/[emacs]/emacs/etc/NEWS
ViewVC logotype

Contents of /emacs/etc/NEWS

Parent Directory Parent Directory | Revision Log Revision Log


Revision 1.748 - (show annotations) (download)
Thu Oct 3 00:52:39 2002 UTC (21 years, 7 months ago) by jpw
Branch: MAIN
Changes since 1.747: +4 -0 lines
Mention `delete-frame-functions' replacing `delete-frame-hook',
obsolete alias remains.

1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-03-15
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 See the end for copying conditions.
4
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS
7
8 Temporary note:
9 +++ indicates that the appropriate manual has already been updated.
10 --- means no change in the manuals is called for.
11 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
12 so we will look at it and add it to the manual.
13
14
15 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.4
16
17 ---
18 ** Emacs can now be built without sound support.
19
20 ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with elisp code.
21
22 ---
23 ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix',
24 `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of
25 installed programs.
26
27 ---
28 ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game
29 scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal
30 place for game scores to be stored. This may be controlled by the
31 configure option `--with-game-dir'. The specific user that Emacs uses
32 to own the game scores is controlled by `--with-game-user'. If access
33 to a game user is not available, then scores will be stored separately
34 in each user's home directory.
35
36 ---
37 ** Leim is now part of the Emacs distribution.
38 You no longer need to download a separate tarball in order to build
39 Emacs with Leim.
40
41 ---
42 ** Support for AIX 5.1 was added.
43
44 ---
45 ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added.
46
47 ---
48 ** Support for BSD/OS 5.0 was added.
49
50 ---
51 ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on S390 machines was added.
52
53 ---
54 ** Support for MacOS X was added.
55 See the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions.
56
57 ---
58 ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on X86-64 machines was added.
59
60 * Changes in Emacs 21.4
61
62 ** MH-E changes.
63
64 Upgraded to mh-e version 6.1.1. There have been major changes since
65 version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details.
66
67 +++
68 ** The `emacsclient' understand the options `--eval' and `--display'
69 which tell Emacs resp. to evaluate the given elisp expressions and
70 to use the given display when visiting files.
71
72 +++
73 ** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode.
74 When the file is maintained under version control, that information
75 appears between the position information and the major mode.
76
77 ** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer
78 against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving.
79
80 +++
81 ** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this
82 for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the
83 top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To
84 control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x
85 set-fringe-style.
86
87 +++
88 ** There is a new user option `mail-default-directory' that allows you
89 to specify the value of `default-directory' for mail buffers. This
90 directory is used for auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to
91 "~/".
92
93 +++
94 ** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify
95 read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you
96 want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you will in fact be able
97 to alter the file.)
98
99 ** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r)
100 revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify.
101
102 ---
103 ** `ps-print' can now print Unicode characters.
104
105 Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with
106 ps-print, provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF fonts.
107 See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts.
108
109 ---
110 ** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and
111 `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed
112 in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar.
113
114 `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays
115 leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer.
116 If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories will be
117 shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil
118 and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively.
119
120 `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes
121 the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is
122 t, and the status is shown.
123
124 Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time
125 the Buffers menu is regenerated.
126
127 +++
128 ** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window
129 now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are
130 specified for that character, the commands by default customize those
131 faces.
132
133 ** New language environments: French, Cyrillic-KOI8-U, Windows-1251,
134 Cyrillic-KOI8-T, Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8,
135 Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian.
136
137 ---
138 ** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix,
139 ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer,
140 vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard,
141 latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml,
142 bulgarian-phonetic, dutch.
143
144 ---
145 ** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese
146 in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving,
147 Big 5 is then converted to CNS.
148
149 ---
150 ** Many new coding systems are available by loading the `code-pages'
151 library. These include complete versions of most of those in
152 codepage.el, based Unicode mappings.
153
154 ** The utf-8 coding system has been enhanced. Untranslatable utf-8
155 sequences (mostly representing CJK characters) are composed into
156 single quasi-characters. By loading the library utf-8-subst, you can
157 arrange to translate many utf-8 CJK character sequences into real
158 Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS system. The utf-8
159 coding system will now encode characters from most of Emacs's
160 one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones.
161
162 ** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its
163 Unicode.
164
165 +++
166 ** Limited support for character unification has been added.
167 Emacs now knows how to translate Latin-N chars between their charset
168 and some other Latin-N charset or Unicode. By default this
169 translation will happen automatically on encoding. Quail input
170 methods use the translations to make the input conformant with the
171 encoding of the buffer in which it's being used where possible.
172
173 You can force a more complete unification with the user option
174 unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets
175 into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and
176 mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding.
177
178 ** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into
179 either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets,
180 when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is
181 controlled by user option utf-8-fragment-on-decoding.
182
183 ---
184 ** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling.
185 On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual
186 amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it).
187
188 +++
189 ** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor.
190 The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in
191 default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar'
192 cursor does.
193
194 ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in
195 various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on
196 program files that include other program files.
197
198 Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on
199 all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing
200 in them.
201
202 ---
203 ** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers
204 when Emacs visits them.
205
206 ---
207 ** The game `mpuz' is enhanced.
208
209 `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By
210 default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed
211 automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback.
212
213 +++
214 ** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is
215 now shown as a hollow box or a thin bar. However, you can control how
216 it blinks off by setting the variable `blink-cursor-alist'.
217
218
219 +++
220 ** Emacs now supports compound-text Extended Segments in X selections.
221
222 Some versions of X, notably XFree86, use Extended Segments to encode
223 in X selections characters that belong to character sets which are not
224 part of the list of approved standard encodings defined by the ICCCM
225 spec. Examples of such non-standard encodings include ISO 8859-14, ISO
226 8859-15, KOI8-R, and BIG5. The new coding system
227 `compound-text-with-extensions' supports these extensions, and is now
228 used by default for encoding and decoding X selections. If you don't
229 want this support, set `selection-coding-system' to `compound-text'.
230
231 +++
232 ** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized.
233 The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from
234 the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling
235 will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5.
236
237 The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic
238 hscrolling will scroll the window when point gets too close to the
239 window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the
240 window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how
241 many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it
242 gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window.
243
244 The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to
245 `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias.
246
247 +++
248 ** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced
249 by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold
250 command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold
251 TeX commands to use at startup.
252
253 +++
254 ** New display feature: focus follows mouse. If you set the variable
255 mouse-autoselect-window to non-nil value, moving the mouse to a different
256 Emacs window will select that window (minibuffer window can be selected
257 only when it is active). The default is nil, so that this feature is not
258 enabled.
259
260 +++
261 ** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with
262 description various information about a character, including its
263 encodings and syntax, its text properties, overlays, and widgets at
264 point. You can get more information about some of them, by clicking
265 on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET.
266
267 +++
268 ** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can
269 search multiple buffers. There is also a new command
270 `multi-occur-by-filename-regexp' which allows you to specify the
271 buffers to search by their filename. Internally, Occur mode has been
272 rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other changes.
273
274 +++
275 ** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse
276 is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you
277 can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the
278 mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can
279 also disable mouse highlighting.
280
281 +++
282 ** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that
283 an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment,
284 font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red
285 if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause
286 trouble with fontification and/or indentation.
287
288 +++
289 ** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'.
290 Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the
291 variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the
292 prompt string.
293
294 +++
295 ** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line
296 of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display
297 the mode line of the currently selected window.
298
299 The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether
300 the `mode-line-inactive' face is used.
301
302 ---
303 ** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options".
304 This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such
305 as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself).
306 You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn
307 it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of
308 current date and time, current line and column number in the
309 mode-line.
310
311 ---
312 ** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide".
313
314 +++
315 ** Emacs can now indicate in the mode-line the presence of new e-mails
316 in a directory or in a file. See the documentation of the user option
317 `display-time-mail-directory'.
318
319 +++
320 ** The new option `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' causes Info to behave
321 like the stand-alone Info reader (from the GNU Texinfo package) as far
322 as motion between nodes and their subnodes is concerned. If it is t
323 (the default), Emacs behaves as before when you type SPC in a menu: it
324 visits the subnode pointed to by the first menu entry. If this option
325 is nil, SPC scrolls to the end of the current node, and only then goes
326 to the first menu item, like the stand-alone reader does.
327
328 This change was already in Emacs 21.1, but wasn't advertised in the
329 NEWS.
330
331 ---
332 ** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2.
333
334 +++
335 ** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it.
336 M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no
337 argument it toggles the mode.
338
339 Turning off PC-Selection mode restores the global key bindings
340 that were replaced by turning on the mode.
341
342 +++
343 ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line
344 arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash
345 disables the splash screen; see also the variable
346 `inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as
347 `inhibit-splash-screen').
348
349 ** Changes in support of colors on character terminals
350
351 +++
352 *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard
353 mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character
354 terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal
355 database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't
356 set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable
357 terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls'
358 when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors
359 in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the
360 user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter.
361
362 ---
363 *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more
364 than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and
365 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup
366 the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for
367 all of these colors.
368
369 ---
370 *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator.
371
372 +++
373 ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display.
374
375 When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options
376 `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame
377 whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire
378 screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.)
379
380 ---
381 ** Info-index offers completion.
382
383 ---
384 ** shell-mode now supports programmable completion using `pcomplete'.
385
386 ---
387 ** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files
388 automatically.
389
390 +++
391 ** The new command `comint-input-previous-argument' in comint-derived
392 modes (shell-mode etc) inserts arguments from previous command lines,
393 like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but
394 otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version.
395
396 +++
397 ** Changes in C-h bindings:
398
399 C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer.
400
401 C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files
402 that do not change:
403
404 C-h C-f displays the FAQ.
405 C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file.
406
407 The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i
408 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S.
409
410 C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands.
411
412 - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping)
413 run by the key sequence.
414
415 - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the
416 command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run
417 that command.
418
419 For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped
420 to new-kill-line, these commands now report:
421
422 - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports:
423 C-k runs the command new-kill-line
424
425 - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports:
426 kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline>
427
428 - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports:
429 new-kill-line is on C-k
430
431 +++
432 ** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word,
433 making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the
434 command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior,
435 bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'.
436
437 +++
438 ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can
439 be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable
440 `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion
441 of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties.
442
443 +++
444 ** Occur, Info, and comint-derived modes now support using
445 M-x font-lock-mode to toggle fontification. The variable
446 `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable fontification,
447 remove `turn-on-font-lock' from `Info-mode-hook'.
448
449 +++
450 ** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line
451 by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep will automatically
452 detect whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked.
453 When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed
454 unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated
455 command lines to be used than was possible before.
456
457 ---
458 ** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing.
459 In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding
460 check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection
461 for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make
462 sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking
463 its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in
464 case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden.
465
466 +++
467 ** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer,
468 the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable.
469 You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value"
470 under the "[State]" button.
471
472 +++
473 ** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program
474 counter to the specified source line (the one where point is).
475
476 ---
477 ** GUD mode improvements for jdb:
478
479 *** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class
480 information. Fast startup since there is no need to scan all
481 source files up front. There is also no need to create and maintain
482 lists of source directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath'
483 and `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation.
484
485 *** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear)
486 set/clear operations from java source files under the classpath, stack
487 traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish
488 (gud-finish).
489
490 *** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb
491 (Java 1.1 jdb).
492
493 *** The previous method of searching for source files has been
494 preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it.
495 Set gud-jdb-use-classpath to nil.
496
497 Added Customization Variables
498
499 *** gud-jdb-command-name. What command line to use to invoke jdb.
500
501 *** gud-jdb-use-classpath. Allows selection of java source file searching
502 method: set to t for new method, nil to scan gud-jdb-directories for
503 java sources (previous method).
504
505 *** gud-jdb-directories. List of directories to scan and search for java
506 classes using the original gud-jdb method (if gud-jdb-use-classpath
507 is nil).
508
509 Minor Improvements
510
511 *** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds.
512
513 +++
514 ** hide-ifdef-mode now uses overlays rather than selective-display
515 to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly
516 changes the behavior of motion commands line C-e and C-p.
517
518 +++
519 ** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now
520 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded
521 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards
522 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the
523 doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent
524 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'.
525
526 +++
527 ** Dired's v command now runs external viewers to view certain
528 types of files. The variable `dired-view-command-alist' controls
529 what external viewers to use and when.
530
531 +++
532 ** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when
533 the corresponding environment variable does not exist.
534 Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting
535 is only rarely needed.
536
537 ---
538 ** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'.
539
540 If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs
541 idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For
542 example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will
543 only happen after 0.25s of idle time.
544
545 +++
546 ** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times. If
547 you hit M-C-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h (mark-paragraph), or
548 C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region will now be extended
549 each time, so you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC M-C-SPC,
550 for example. This feature also works for mark-end-of-sentence, if you
551 bind that to a key.
552
553 +++
554 ** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the
555 mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the
556 region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might
557 want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two
558 ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one
559 command only.
560
561 One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode
562 and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x.
563 This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the
564 mark or the region.
565
566 After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you
567 deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command
568 that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing
569 C-g.
570
571 +++
572 ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a
573 previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... will cycle through the
574 mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump.
575
576 +++
577 ** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and
578 C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without
579 switching to it.
580
581 +++
582 ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to
583 all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only
584 affects the initial frame.
585
586 +++
587 ** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg.
588 With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs;
589 if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding
590 paragraphs.
591
592 ** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name
593 into the kill ring.
594
595 +++
596 ** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args
597 have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and
598 directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a
599 directory listing into a buffer.
600
601 ---
602 ** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window
603 (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'.
604
605 +++
606 ** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on
607 your current locale settings. If it turns out that your terminal
608 does not support the encoding implied by your locale (for example,
609 it inserts non-ASCII chars if you hit M-i), you will need to add
610
611 (set-keyboard-coding-system nil)
612
613 to your .emacs to revert to the old behavior.
614
615 +++
616 ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs
617 automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save
618 modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It
619 can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first,
620 according to the value of `save-abbrevs'.
621
622 +++
623 ** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any)
624 of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor
625 appears in.
626
627 ** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any
628 of the recognized cursor types.
629
630 +++
631 ** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay'
632 were changed.
633
634 ---
635 ** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs
636 now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode.
637
638 ---
639 ** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that
640 controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will
641 attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files).
642
643 +++
644 ** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar.
645 Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as
646 `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic' now take an optional parameter MARK,
647 which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating
648 how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a
649 single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the
650 day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that
651 face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations,
652 appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp.
653
654 ** VC Changes
655
656 *** The key C-x C-q no longer checks files in or out, it only changes
657 the read-only state of the buffer (toggle-read-only). We made this
658 change because we held a poll and found that many users were unhappy
659 with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this behavior, you
660 can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your .emacs:
661
662 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only)
663
664 The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist.
665
666 +++
667 *** There is a new user option `vc-cvs-global-switches' that allows
668 you to specify switches that are passed to any CVS command invoked
669 by VC. These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which
670 means they are inserted before the command name. For example, this
671 allows you to specify a compression level using the "-z#" option for
672 CVS.
673
674 ** EDiff changes.
675
676 +++
677 *** When comparing directories.
678 Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of
679 directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files
680 from one directory to another.
681
682 +++
683 *** When comparing files or buffers.
684 Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the
685 currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n'
686 then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for
687 comparison.
688
689 ** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent
690 backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file,
691 `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup.
692
693 +++
694 ** Etags changes.
695
696 *** New regular expressions features
697
698 **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions.
699 The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained
700 only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is
701 --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS,
702 where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or
703 more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s'
704 (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular
705 expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s'
706 (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to
707 span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions
708 and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages.
709
710 **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in Gcc.
711 The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v,
712 respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL,
713 CR, TAB, VT,
714
715 **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language.
716 The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags
717 only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is
718 particularly useful when storing regexps in a file.
719
720 **** Regular expressions can be read from a file.
721 The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one
722 per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored.
723
724 *** New language parsing features
725
726 **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file.
727 Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect.
728
729 **** In Perl, packages are tags.
730 Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags
731 as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for
732 package::sub.
733
734 **** New language PHP.
735 Tags are functions, classes and defines.
736 If the --members option is specified to etags, tags are vars also.
737
738 **** New language HTML.
739 Title and h1, h2, h3 are tagged. Also, tags are generated when name= is
740 used inside an anchor and whenever id= is used.
741
742 **** New default keywords for TeX.
743 The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and
744 renewenvironment.
745
746 **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged.
747 If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the
748 size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option.
749
750 **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates.
751
752 *** Honour #line directives.
753 When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line
754 directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number
755 specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code
756 created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it
757 writes tags pointing to the source file.
758
759 *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE.
760 This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can
761 be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags
762 will read from standard input and mark the produced tags as belonging to
763 the file FILE.
764
765 +++
766 ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to
767 --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated.
768
769 +++
770 ** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because
771 C-u C-x = gives the same information and more.
772
773 +++
774 ** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin
775 with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers
776 whose names begin with space are omitted.
777
778 +++
779 ** You can now customize fill-nobreak-predicate to control where
780 filling can break lines. We provide two sample predicates,
781 fill-single-word-nobreak-p and fill-french-nobreak-p.
782
783 +++
784 ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'.
785 When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry will always
786 start a new record regardless of when the last record is.
787
788 +++
789 ** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax.
790 The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax.
791 When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style,
792 i.e., there is always a closing tag.
793 By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis
794 from the file name or buffer contents.
795
796 +++
797 ** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `smgl-mode', which has XML support.
798
799 +++
800 ** New user option `isearch-resume-enabled'.
801 This option can be disabled, to avoid the normal behavior of isearch
802 which puts calls to `isearch-resume' in the command history.
803
804 ---
805 ** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from
806 initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode,
807 instead of using default-major-mode.
808
809 ---
810 ** Lisp mode now uses font-lock-doc-face for the docstrings.
811
812 ---
813 ** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'.
814
815 +++
816 ** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'.
817 Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use.
818 Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking.
819
820 ---
821 ** F90 mode has new navigation commands `f90-end-of-block',
822 `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block', `f90-previous-block'.
823
824 ---
825 ** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords'
826 to support use of font-lock.
827
828 +++
829 ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now
830 understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and
831 `same-window'.
832
833 +++
834 ** M-x setenv now expands environment variables of the form `$foo' and
835 `${foo}' in the specified new value of the environment variable. To
836 include a `$' in the value, use `$$'.
837
838 +++
839 ** File-name completion can now ignore directories.
840 If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a
841 slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when
842 completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions'
843 which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion
844 candidate is a directory.
845
846 +++
847 ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only
848 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point,
849 it remains unchanged.
850
851 +++
852 ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'.
853 When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally
854 displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off.
855
856 ---
857 ** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer.
858
859 ---
860 ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor.
861 This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track
862 the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs.
863
864 ---
865 ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows.
866 See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details.
867
868 ---
869 ** Some images are now supported on Windows.
870 PBM and XBM images are supported, other formats which require external
871 libraries may be supported in future.
872
873 ---
874 ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows.
875 The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls
876 whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or
877 pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions.
878
879 +++
880 ** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper).
881 The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym',
882 and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should
883 use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap
884 Meta and Alt:
885 (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta)
886 (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt)
887
888 ---
889 ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available.
890
891 ---
892 ** A French translation of the Emacs Tutorial is available.
893
894 ** New modes and packages
895
896 ---
897 *** The new ido package is an extension of the iswitchb package
898 to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition to
899 interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with a
900 few exceptions), so don't enable both packages.
901
902 ---
903 *** The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for
904 cut (kill), C-c for copy, C-v for paste (yank), and C-z for undo.
905 With cua, the region can be set and extended using shifted movement
906 keys (like pc-selection-mode) and typed text replaces the active
907 region (like delete-selection-mode). Do not enable these modes with
908 cua-mode. Customize the variable `cua-mode' to enable cua.
909
910 In addition, cua provides unified rectangle support with visible
911 rectangle highlighting: Use S-return to start a rectangle, extend it
912 using the movement commands (or mouse-3), and cut or copy it using C-x
913 or C-c (using C-w and M-w also works).
914
915 Use M-o and M-c to `open' or `close' the rectangle, use M-b or M-f, to
916 fill it with blanks or another character, use M-u or M-l to upcase or
917 downcase the rectangle, use M-i to increment the numbers in the
918 rectangle, use M-n to fill the rectangle with a numeric sequence (such
919 as 10 20 30...), use M-r to replace a regexp in the rectangle, and use
920 M-' or M-/ to restrict command on the rectangle to a subset of the
921 rows. See the commentary in cua-base.el for more rectangle commands.
922
923 Cua also provides unified support for registers: Use a numeric
924 prefix argument between 0 and 9, i.e. M-0 .. M-9, for C-x, C-c, and
925 C-v to cut or copy into register 0-9, or paste from register 0-9.
926
927 The last text deleted (not killed) is automatically stored in
928 register 0. This includes text deleted by typing text.
929
930 Finally, cua provides a global mark which is set using S-C-space.
931 When the global mark is active, any text which is cut or copied is
932 automatically inserted at the global mark position. See the
933 commentary in cua-base.el for more global mark related commands.
934
935 The features of cua also works with the standard emacs bindings for
936 kill, copy, yank, and undo. If you want to use cua mode, but don't
937 want the C-x, C-c, C-v, and C-z bindings, you may customize the
938 `cua-enable-cua-keys' variable.
939
940 *** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for
941 the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric
942 keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked
943 +, -, /, and *, an Enter key, and a NumLock toggle key. The keypad
944 package only controls the use of the digit and decimal keys.
945
946 By customizing the variables `keypad-setup', `keypad-shifted-setup',
947 `keypad-numlock-setup', and `keypad-numlock-shifted-setup', or by
948 using the function `keypad-setup', you can rebind all digit keys and
949 the decimal key of the keypad in one step for each of the four
950 possible combinations of the Shift key state (not pressed/pressed) and
951 the NumLock toggle state (off/on).
952
953 The choices for the keypad keys in each of the above states are:
954 `Plain numeric keypad' where the keys generates plain digits,
955 `Numeric keypad with decimal key' where the character produced by the
956 decimal key can be customized individually (for internationalization),
957 `Numeric Prefix Arg' where the keypad keys produce numeric prefix args
958 for emacs editing commands, `Cursor keys' and `Shifted Cursor keys'
959 where the keys work like (shifted) arrow keys, home/end, etc., and
960 `Unspecified/User-defined' where the keypad keys (kp-0, kp-1, etc.)
961 are left unspecified and can be bound individually through the global
962 or local keymaps.
963
964 *** The new kmacro package provides a simpler user interface to
965 emacs' keyboard macro facilities.
966
967 Basically, it uses two function keys (default F3 and F4) like this:
968 F3 starts a macro, F4 ends the macro, and pressing F4 again executes
969 the last macro. While defining the macro, F3 inserts a counter value
970 which automatically increments every time the macro is executed.
971
972 There is now a keyboard macro ring which stores the most recently
973 defined macros.
974
975 The C-x C-k sequence is now a prefix for the kmacro keymap which
976 defines bindings for moving through the keyboard macro ring,
977 C-x C-k C-p and C-x C-k C-n, editing the last macro C-x C-k C-e,
978 manipulating the macro counter and format via C-x C-k C-c,
979 C-x C-k C-a, and C-x C-k C-f. See the commentary in kmacro.el
980 for more commands.
981
982 The normal macro bindings C-x (, C-x ), and C-x e now interfaces to
983 the keyboard macro ring.
984
985 The C-x e command now automatically terminates the current macro
986 before calling it, if used while defining a macro.
987
988 In addition, when ending or calling a macro with C-x e, the macro can
989 be repeated immediately by typing just the `e'. You can customize
990 this behaviour via the variable kmacro-call-repeat-key and
991 kmacro-call-repeat-with-arg.
992
993 Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively.
994 C-x C-k SPC will step through the last keyboard macro one key sequence
995 at a time, prompting for the actions to take.
996
997 +++
998 *** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution.
999
1000 Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in
1001 Emacs Lisp. Its documentation is in a separate manual; within Emacs,
1002 type "C-h i m calc RET" to read that manual. A reference card is
1003 available in `etc/calccard.tex' and `etc/calccard.ps'.
1004
1005 +++
1006 *** The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual is now part of the distribution.
1007
1008 The ELisp reference manual in Info format is built as part of the
1009 Emacs build procedure and installed together with the Emacs User
1010 Manual. A menu item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy
1011 accessible (Help->More Manuals->Emacs Lisp Reference).
1012
1013 +++
1014 *** Tramp is now part of the distribution.
1015
1016 This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote
1017 files. But whereas Ange-FTP uses FTP to access the remote host,
1018 Tramp uses a shell connection. The shell connection is always used
1019 for filename completion and directory listings and suchlike, but for
1020 the actual file transfer, you can choose between the so-called
1021 `inline' methods (which transfer the files through the shell
1022 connection using base64 or uu encoding) and the `out-of-band' methods
1023 (which invoke an external copying program such as `rcp' or `scp' or
1024 `rsync' to do the copying).
1025
1026 Shell connections can be acquired via `rsh', `ssh', `telnet' and also
1027 `su' and `sudo'.
1028
1029 ---
1030 *** The Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp manual is now part of
1031 the distribution.
1032
1033 This manual is now part of the standard distribution and is installed,
1034 together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu
1035 item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible
1036 (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp).
1037
1038 ---
1039 *** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way
1040 filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so
1041 that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to
1042 emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim,
1043 invisible, or otherwise less visually noticable. The display method may
1044 be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'.
1045
1046 ---
1047 *** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an
1048 "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually
1049 change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list'
1050 settings.
1051
1052 ---
1053 *** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you
1054 move your cursor into hidden region of the buffer.
1055 It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts
1056 of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ...
1057
1058 There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers.
1059
1060 ---
1061 *** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely
1062 customizable replacement for buff-menu.el.
1063
1064 *** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded
1065 `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting
1066 these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG
1067 table editing available in modern word processors. The package also
1068 can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such
1069 as latex and html from the visually laid out text table.
1070
1071 ---
1072 ** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed.
1073 Emacs will still work on terminals that require magic cookies in order
1074 to use standout mode, however they will not be able to display
1075 mode-lines in inverse-video.
1076
1077 ** The obsolete C mode (c-mode.el) has been removed to avoid problems
1078 with Custom.
1079
1080
1081 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.4
1082
1083 ** When you are printing using print-continuous-numbering,
1084 if no objects have had to be recorded in print-number-table,
1085 all elements of print-number-table are nil.
1086
1087 ** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width,
1088 the scroll-bar-width frame parameter value is nil.
1089
1090 ** The new function copy-abbrev-table returns a new abbrev table that
1091 is a copy of a given abbrev table.
1092
1093 +++
1094 ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE.
1095 It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they
1096 can start with this line:
1097
1098 #!/usr/bin/emacs --script
1099
1100 ** A function's docstring can now hold the function's usage info on
1101 its last line. It should match the regexp "\n\n(fn.*)\\'".
1102
1103 ** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access
1104 hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'.
1105
1106 ** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional buffer
1107 argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted it defaults to
1108 the current buffer.
1109
1110 ** There is a new Warnings facility; see the functions `warn'
1111 and `display-warning'.
1112
1113 ** The functions all-completions and try-completion now accept lists
1114 of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays
1115 and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now
1116 exported to Lisp.
1117
1118 ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how
1119 much pure storage it will approximately need.
1120
1121 ** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions
1122 to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system
1123 for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific
1124 file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.)
1125
1126 ** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects
1127 of one coding system from another coding system.
1128
1129 ** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that
1130 are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables
1131 specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating
1132 such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is
1133 needed.
1134
1135 ** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property,
1136 that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it
1137 appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property
1138 is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is
1139 ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called
1140 with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call.
1141
1142 If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for
1143 confirmation as before.
1144
1145 ** Controlling the left and right fringe widths.
1146
1147 The left and right fringe widths can now be controlled by setting the
1148 `left-fringe' and `right-fringe' frame parameters to an integer value
1149 specifying the width in pixels. Setting the width to 0 effectively
1150 removes the corresponding fringe.
1151
1152 The actual fringe widths may deviate from the specified widths, since
1153 the combined fringe widths must match an integral number of columns.
1154 The extra width is distributed evenly between the left and right fringe.
1155 For force a specific fringe width, specify the width as a negative
1156 integer (if both widths are negative, only the left fringe gets the
1157 specified width).
1158
1159 Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe
1160 width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any
1161 of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in
1162 fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels.
1163
1164 +++
1165 ** Renamed file hooks to follow the convention:
1166 find-file-hooks to find-file-hook,
1167 find-file-not-found-hooks to find-file-not-found-functions,
1168 write-file-hooks to write-file-functions,
1169 write-contents-hooks to write-contents-functions.
1170 Marked local-write-file-hooks as obsolete (use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook').
1171
1172 ** The new variable `delete-frame-functions' replaces `delete-frame-hook'.
1173 It was renamed to follow the naming conventions for abnormal hooks. The old
1174 name remains available as an alias, but has been marked obsolete.
1175
1176 ** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which
1177 specifies a predicate which the file name read must satify. The
1178 new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument
1179 while reading the file name from the minibuffer; the predicate in this
1180 variable is used by read-file-name-internal to filter the completion list.
1181
1182 ** The new variable `read-file-name-function' can be used by lisp code
1183 to override the internal read-file-name function.
1184
1185 ** The new function `read-directory-name' can be used instead of
1186 `read-file-name' to read a directory name; when used, completion
1187 will only show directories.
1188
1189 ** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns
1190 non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using
1191 its own special methods and not directly through the file system).
1192
1193 ** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file
1194 now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs
1195 (require 'cl) when loaded.
1196
1197 ** The new Lisp library fringe.el controls the apperance of fringes.
1198
1199 ** The `defmacro' form may contain declarations specifying how to
1200 indent the macro in Lisp mode and how to debug it with Edebug. The
1201 syntax of defmacro has been extended to
1202
1203 (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...)
1204
1205 DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The
1206 declaration specifiers supported are:
1207
1208 (indent INDENT)
1209 Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT.
1210
1211 (edebug DEBUG)
1212 Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is
1213 equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro.
1214
1215 ** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps.
1216
1217 This is an alternative to using defadvice or substitute-key-definition
1218 to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap
1219 binding and lookup functionality.
1220
1221 When a key sequence is bound to a command, and that command is
1222 remapped to another command, that command is run instead of the
1223 original command.
1224
1225 Example:
1226 Suppose that minor mode my-mode has defined the commands
1227 my-kill-line and my-kill-word, and it wants C-k (and any other key
1228 bound to kill-line) to run the command my-kill-line instead of
1229 kill-line, and likewise it wants to run my-kill-word instead of
1230 kill-word.
1231
1232 Instead of rebinding C-k and the other keys in the minor mode map,
1233 command remapping allows you to directly map kill-line into
1234 my-kill-line and kill-word into my-kill-word through the minor mode
1235 map using define-key:
1236
1237 (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-line] 'my-kill-line)
1238 (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-word] 'my-kill-word)
1239
1240 Now, when my-mode is enabled, and the user enters C-k or M-d,
1241 the commands my-kill-line and my-kill-word are run.
1242
1243 Notice that only one level of remapping is supported. In the above
1244 example, this means that if my-kill-line is remapped to other-kill,
1245 then C-k still runs my-kill-line.
1246
1247 The following changes have been made to provide command remapping:
1248
1249 - Command remappings are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
1250 `remap', i.e. `(define-key MAP [remap CMD] DEF)' remaps command CMD
1251 to definition DEF in keymap MAP. The definition is not limited to
1252 another command; it can be anything accepted for a normal binding.
1253
1254 - The new function `remap-command' returns the binding for a remapped
1255 command in the current keymaps, or nil if it isn't remapped.
1256
1257 - key-binding now remaps interactive commands unless the optional
1258 third argument NO-REMAP is non-nil.
1259
1260 - where-is-internal now returns nil for a remapped command (e.g.
1261 kill-line if my-mode is enabled), and the actual key binding for
1262 the command it is remapped to (e.g. C-k for my-kill-line).
1263 It also has a new optional fifth argument, NO-REMAP, which inhibits
1264 remapping if non-nil (e.g. it returns C-k for kill-line and
1265 <kill-line> for my-kill-line).
1266
1267 - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original
1268 command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the
1269 command was not remapped.
1270
1271 ** New variable emulation-mode-map-alists.
1272
1273 Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own
1274 keymap alist separate from minor-mode-map-alist by adding their keymap
1275 alist to this list.
1276
1277 ** Atomic change groups.
1278
1279 To perform some changes in the current buffer "atomically" so that
1280 they either all succeed or are all undone, use `atomic-change-group'
1281 around the code that makes changes. For instance:
1282
1283 (atomic-change-group
1284 (insert foo)
1285 (delete-region x y))
1286
1287 If an error (or other nonlocal exit) occurs inside the body of
1288 `atomic-change-group', it unmakes all the changes in that buffer that
1289 were during the execution of the body. The change group has no effect
1290 on any other buffers--any such changes remain.
1291
1292 If you need something more sophisticated, you can directly call the
1293 lower-level functions that `atomic-change-group' uses. Here is how.
1294
1295 To set up a change group for one buffer, call `prepare-change-group'.
1296 Specify the buffer as argument; it defaults to the current buffer.
1297 This function returns a "handle" for the change group. You must save
1298 the handle to activate the change group and then finish it.
1299
1300 Before you change the buffer again, you must activate the change
1301 group. Pass the handle to `activate-change-group' afterward to
1302 do this.
1303
1304 After you make the changes, you must finish the change group. You can
1305 either accept the changes or cancel them all. Call
1306 `accept-change-group' to accept the changes in the group as final;
1307 call `cancel-change-group' to undo them all.
1308
1309 You should use `unwind-protect' to make sure the group is always
1310 finished. The call to `activate-change-group' should be inside the
1311 `unwind-protect', in case the user types C-g just after it runs.
1312 (This is one reason why `prepare-change-group' and
1313 `activate-change-group' are separate functions.) Once you finish the
1314 group, don't use the handle again--don't try to finish the same group
1315 twice.
1316
1317 To make a multibuffer change group, call `prepare-change-group' once
1318 for each buffer you want to cover, then use `nconc' to combine the
1319 returned values, like this:
1320
1321 (nconc (prepare-change-group buffer-1)
1322 (prepare-change-group buffer-2))
1323
1324 You can then activate the multibuffer change group with a single call
1325 to `activate-change-group', and finish it with a single call to
1326 `accept-change-group' or `cancel-change-group'.
1327
1328 Nested use of several change groups for the same buffer works as you
1329 would expect. Non-nested use of change groups for the same buffer
1330 will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first
1331 change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one
1332 finished.
1333
1334 +++
1335 ** New variable char-property-alias-alist.
1336
1337 This variable allows you to create alternative names for text
1338 properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties',
1339 although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced
1340 to implement the `font-lock-face' property.
1341
1342 ** New special text property `font-lock-face'.
1343
1344 This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by
1345 M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text
1346 property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the
1347 new variable `char-property-alias-alist'.
1348
1349 ** New function remove-list-of-text-properties.
1350
1351 The new function `remove-list-of-text-properties' is almost the same
1352 as `remove-text-properties'. The only difference is that it takes
1353 a list of property names as argument rather than a property list.
1354
1355 ** New functions insert-for-yank and insert-buffer-substring-as-yank.
1356
1357 These functions work like `insert' and `insert-buffer-substring', but
1358 removes the text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list.
1359
1360 ** New function insert-buffer-substring-no-properties.
1361
1362 ** New function display-supports-face-attributes-p may be used to test
1363 whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable.
1364
1365 A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face
1366 specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces
1367 defined with defface.
1368
1369 ** face-attribute, face-foreground, face-background, and face-stipple now
1370 accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how face
1371 inheritance is used when determining the value of a face attribute.
1372
1373 ** New functions face-attribute-relative-p and merge-face-attribute
1374 help with handling relative face attributes.
1375
1376 ** Enhanced networking support.
1377
1378 *** There is a new `make-network-process' function which supports
1379 opening of stream and datagram connections to a server, as well as
1380 create a stream or datagram server inside emacs.
1381
1382 - A server is started using :server t arg.
1383 - Datagram connection is selected using :type 'datagram arg.
1384 - A server can open on a random port using :service t arg.
1385 - Local sockets are supported using :family 'local arg.
1386 - Non-blocking connect is supported using :nowait t arg.
1387
1388 To test for the availability of a given feature, use featurep like this:
1389 (featurep 'make-network-process '(:type datagram))
1390
1391 *** Original open-network-stream is now emulated using make-network-process.
1392
1393 *** New function open-network-stream-nowait.
1394
1395 This function initiates a non-blocking connect and returns immediately
1396 before the connection is established. The filter and sentinel
1397 functions can be specified as arguments to open-network-stream-nowait.
1398 When the non-blocking connect completes, the sentinel is called with
1399 the status matching "open" or "failed".
1400
1401 *** New function open-network-stream-server.
1402 MORE INFO NEEDED HERE.
1403
1404 *** New functions process-datagram-address and set-process-datagram-address.
1405 MORE INFO NEEDED HERE.
1406
1407 *** By default, the function process-contact still returns (HOST SERVICE)
1408 for a network process. Using the new optional KEY arg, the complete list
1409 of network process properties or a specific property can be selected.
1410
1411 Using :local and :remote as the KEY, the address of the local or
1412 remote end-point is returned. An Inet address is represented as a 5
1413 element vector, where the first 4 elements contain the IP address and
1414 the fifth is the port number.
1415
1416 *** Network processes can now be stopped and restarted with
1417 `stop-process' and `continue-process'. For a server process, no
1418 connections are accepted in the stopped state. For a client process,
1419 no input is received in the stopped state.
1420
1421 *** Function list-processes now has an optional argument; if non-nil,
1422 only the processes whose query-on-exit flag is set are listed.
1423
1424 *** New set-process-query-on-exit-flag and process-query-on-exit-flag
1425 functions. The existing process-kill-without-query function is still
1426 supported, but new code should use the new functions.
1427
1428 ** New function copy-tree.
1429
1430 ** New function substring-no-properties.
1431
1432 ** New function minibuffer-selected-window.
1433
1434 ** New function `call-process-shell-command'.
1435
1436 ** The dummy function keys made by easymenu
1437 are now always lower case. If you specify the
1438 menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada'
1439 as the "key" bound by that key binding.
1440
1441 This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for
1442 the bindings that were made with easymenu.
1443
1444 ** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional
1445 argument. If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks
1446 for a function that could be called with `call-interactively',
1447 and does not return t for keyboard macros.
1448
1449 ** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave
1450 buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer.
1451
1452 It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master
1453 and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi
1454 buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the
1455 commands.
1456
1457 This is how to use sql.el and master.el together: the variable
1458 sql-buffer contains the slave buffer. It is a local variable in the
1459 SQL buffer.
1460
1461 (add-hook 'sql-mode-hook
1462 (function (lambda ()
1463 (master-mode t)
1464 (master-set-slave sql-buffer))))
1465 (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook
1466 (function (lambda ()
1467 (master-set-slave sql-buffer))))
1468
1469 ** File local variables.
1470
1471 A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text
1472 properties--any specified text properties are discarded.
1473
1474 +++
1475 *** The meanings of scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively
1476 have been interchanged, so that the former now controls scrolling up,
1477 and the latter now controls scrolling down.
1478
1479 +++
1480 ** New function window-body-height.
1481
1482 This is like window-height but does not count the mode line
1483 or the header line.
1484
1485 ** New function format-mode-line.
1486
1487 This returns the mode-line or header-line of the selected (or a
1488 specified) window as a string with or without text properties.
1489
1490 ** New functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put'.
1491
1492 These functions are like `plist-get' and `plist-put' except that they
1493 compare the property name using `equal' rather than `eq'.
1494
1495 ** New function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu'
1496
1497 The `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' most not be used (as previously
1498 recommended) for making entries in the tool bar for local keymaps.
1499 Instead, use the function `tool-bar-local-item-from-menu', which lets
1500 you specify the map to use as an argument.
1501
1502 +++
1503 ** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument.
1504
1505 When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the
1506 angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is
1507 equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.)
1508
1509 +++
1510 ** You can now make a window as short as one line.
1511
1512 A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode
1513 line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and
1514 `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall
1515 cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the
1516 variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears.
1517
1518 +++
1519 ** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use
1520 for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a
1521 number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp
1522 Reference manual for more detailed documentation.
1523
1524 ** Mode line display ignores text properties in the value
1525 of a variable whose `risky-local-variables' property is nil.
1526
1527 ---
1528 ** Indentation of simple and extended loop forms has been added to the
1529 cl-indent package. The new user options
1530 `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation', `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and
1531 `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can be used to customize the
1532 indentation of keywords and forms in loop forms.
1533
1534 ---
1535 ** Indentation of backquoted forms has been made customizable in the
1536 cl-indent package. See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'.
1537
1538 ** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough:
1539
1540 Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes
1541 from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte
1542 buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them
1543 now:
1544
1545 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time.
1546
1547 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid
1548 the time it takes to convert the format.
1549
1550 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and
1551 wasteful.
1552
1553 ** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence
1554 over minor mode keymaps.
1555
1556 ** A hex escape in a string forces the string to be multibyte.
1557 An octal escape makes it unibyte.
1558
1559 ** Only one of the beginning or end of an invisible, intangible region is
1560 considered an acceptable value for point; which one is determined by
1561 examining how the invisible/intangible properties are inherited when new
1562 text is inserted adjacent to them. If text inserted at the beginning would
1563 inherit the invisible/intangible properties, then that position is
1564 considered unacceptable, and point is forced to the position following the
1565 invisible/intangible text. If text inserted at the end would inherit the
1566 properties, then the opposite happens.
1567
1568 Thus, point can only go to one end of an invisible, intangible region, but
1569 not the other one. This prevents C-f and C-b from appearing to stand still
1570 on the screen.
1571
1572 ** field-beginning and field-end now accept an additional optional
1573 argument, LIMIT.
1574
1575 +++
1576 ** define-abbrev now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG. If
1577 non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means that
1578 it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the abbrevs.
1579 Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always specify this
1580 flag.
1581
1582 ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed.
1583
1584 ** The function insert-string is now obsolete.
1585
1586 ** The precedence of file-name-handlers has been changed.
1587 Instead of blindly choosing the first handler that matches,
1588 find-file-name-handler now gives precedence to a file-name handler
1589 that matches near the end of the file name. More specifically, the
1590 handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen.
1591 In case of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies.
1592
1593 ** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly.
1594 Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key
1595 bindings of the parent keymap.
1596
1597 ** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'.
1598 If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified
1599 (see jit-lock-defer-contextually), then all of that text will
1600 be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element
1601 depends on text several lines further down (and when font-lock-multiline
1602 is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl:
1603
1604 s{
1605 foo
1606 }{
1607 bar
1608 }e
1609
1610 Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of
1611 text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a jit-lock-defer-multiline
1612 property over the second half of the command to force (deferred)
1613 refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed.
1614
1615 ** describe-vector now takes a second argument `describer' which is
1616 called to print the entries' values. It defaults to `princ'.
1617
1618 ** defcustom and other custom declarations now use a default group
1619 (the last group defined in the same file) when no :group was given.
1620
1621 ** emacsserver now runs pre-command-hook and post-command-hook when
1622 it receives a request from emacsclient.
1623
1624 ** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted.
1625 Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more
1626 than 3 levels of nesting.
1627
1628 ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have
1629 been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used
1630 in Indented-Text mode.
1631
1632 ** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect'
1633 property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use
1634 it in that buffer.
1635
1636 ** If you set `query-replace-skip-read-only' non-nil,
1637 `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore
1638 a match if part of it has a read-only property.
1639
1640 ** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits
1641 properties from surrounding text.
1642
1643 ** New function `buffer-local-value'.
1644
1645 - Function: buffer-local-value variable buffer
1646
1647 This function returns the buffer-local binding of VARIABLE (a symbol)
1648 in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not have a buffer-local binding in
1649 buffer BUFFER, it returns the default value of VARIABLE instead.
1650
1651 ** New function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text
1652 that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one
1653 clone to the other.
1654
1655 ** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'.
1656 *** the FACENAME returned in font-lock-keywords can be a list
1657 of the form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set
1658 other properties than `face'.
1659 *** font-lock-extra-managed-props can be set to make sure those extra
1660 properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock.
1661
1662 ** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR'
1663 or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the
1664 `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors.
1665
1666 ** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks'
1667 are used by define-derived-mode to make sure the mode hook for the
1668 parent mode is run at the end of the child mode.
1669
1670 ** define-derived-mode by default creates a new empty abbrev table.
1671 It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table.
1672
1673 +++
1674 ** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument
1675 to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist'
1676 and run any code associated with the provided feature.
1677
1678 ** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can
1679 be used to transform filenames found in compilation output.
1680
1681 +++
1682 ** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now
1683 ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as
1684 `.emacs' are treated as extensionless.
1685
1686 ** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the
1687 user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name'
1688 accepts a float as UID parameter.
1689
1690 ** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1.
1691
1692 ** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in elisp files is now obeyed.
1693
1694 ** The Emacs Lisp byte-compiler now displays the actual line and
1695 character position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form
1696 of its warning and error messages have been brought more in line with
1697 the output of other GNU tools.
1698
1699 ** New functions `keymap-prompt' and `current-active-maps'.
1700
1701 ** New function `describe-buffer-bindings'.
1702
1703 ** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when
1704 searching for an executable resp. an elisp file.
1705
1706 ** Variable aliases have been implemented:
1707
1708 - Function: defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING]
1709
1710 This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for
1711 symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR
1712 returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR
1713 changes the value of BASE-VAR.
1714
1715 DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has
1716 the same documentation as BASE-VAR.
1717
1718 - Function: indirect-variable VARIABLE
1719
1720 This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases
1721 of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not
1722 defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE.
1723
1724 It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of
1725 variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables.
1726
1727 ** Functions from `post-gc-hook' are run at the end of garbage
1728 collection. The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care.
1729
1730 ** If the second argument to `copy-file' is the name of a directory,
1731 the file is copied to that directory instead of signaling an error.
1732
1733 ** The variables most-positive-fixnum and most-negative-fixnum
1734 have been moved from the CL package to the core.
1735
1736 ** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS.
1737 The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was
1738 formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system.
1739
1740 ** Functions y-or-n-p, read-char, read-keysequence and alike that
1741 display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer now display the prompt
1742 using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string.
1743
1744 ** New packages:
1745
1746 *** The new package syntax.el provides an efficient way to find the
1747 current syntactic context (as returned by parse-partial-sexp).
1748
1749 *** The new package bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack
1750 binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp
1751 data structures.
1752
1753 *** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el.
1754 This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented.
1755
1756 *** The new package button.el implements simple and fast `clickable buttons'
1757 in emacs buffers. `buttons' are much lighter-weight than the `widgets'
1758 implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that doesn't
1759 require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for such things
1760 as help and apropos buffers.
1761
1762
1763 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
1764
1765 See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and
1766 fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra
1767 charsets in this release.
1768
1769 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
1770
1771 ** Support for LynxOS has been added.
1772
1773 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for
1774 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
1775 to list them.
1776
1777 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
1778 support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
1779 maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
1780 build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
1781 necessary changes to unexec.
1782
1783 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
1784 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
1785
1786 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
1787 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
1788
1789 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
1790 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
1791
1792 ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
1793 all of the new display features described below. The port currently
1794 lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
1795 "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
1796 description of aspects specific to the Mac.
1797
1798 ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
1799 new display features described below.
1800
1801
1802 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
1803
1804 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
1805
1806 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
1807 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
1808 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
1809 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
1810 the text.
1811
1812 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
1813
1814 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
1815 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
1816 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
1817 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
1818 specify a font.
1819
1820 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
1821 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
1822 under Lisp changes, below.
1823
1824 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
1825
1826 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
1827 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
1828 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
1829 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
1830 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
1831 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
1832 on terminals.
1833
1834 The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
1835 supported on character terminals.
1836
1837 Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of
1838 the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the
1839 same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on
1840 a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option.
1841
1842 ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
1843
1844 ** Sound support
1845
1846 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
1847 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
1848 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
1849 You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable
1850 sound support.
1851
1852 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
1853
1854 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
1855 longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
1856 is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
1857 minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
1858
1859 - User option: max-mini-window-height
1860
1861 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
1862 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
1863 specifies a number of lines.
1864
1865 Default is 0.25.
1866
1867 - User option: resize-mini-windows
1868
1869 How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
1870 resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
1871 grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
1872 again.
1873
1874 Default is `grow-only'.
1875
1876 ** LessTif support.
1877
1878 Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see
1879 <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later.
1880
1881 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
1882
1883 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
1884 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
1885 non-nil.
1886
1887 ** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported.
1888
1889 When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version
1890 now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a
1891 file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog.
1892
1893 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
1894
1895 Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for
1896 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when
1897 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
1898 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
1899 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
1900 Emacs.
1901
1902 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
1903 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
1904 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
1905 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
1906 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
1907 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
1908
1909 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
1910 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
1911 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
1912 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
1913 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
1914 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
1915
1916 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
1917 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
1918 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
1919 imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
1920 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
1921
1922 ** Tool bar support.
1923
1924 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
1925 of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
1926 changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
1927 displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
1928 if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
1929 icons will be used.
1930
1931 To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
1932 for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
1933
1934 ** Tooltips.
1935
1936 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
1937 mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1938 turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
1939
1940 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1941 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1942 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1943 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1944
1945 ** Automatic Hscrolling
1946
1947 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
1948 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
1949 customized.
1950
1951 If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
1952 scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
1953 for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
1954 the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
1955 to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
1956
1957 ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
1958 of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is
1959 solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option
1960 `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the
1961 cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if
1962 non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown.
1963
1964 ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display
1965 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
1966 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
1967 customizing face `fringe'.
1968
1969 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
1970 You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
1971 In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D
1972 appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line
1973 occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of
1974 the window to be partially obscured.)
1975
1976 The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
1977 versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated.
1978 However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be
1979 ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face.
1980
1981 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
1982
1983 Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all
1984 systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a
1985 mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the
1986 mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is
1987 displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you
1988 have enabled one.
1989
1990 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
1991
1992 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer.
1993
1994 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer.
1995
1996 - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
1997 `*') toggles the status.
1998
1999 - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu.
2000
2001 ** Hourglass pointer
2002
2003 Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can
2004 turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
2005
2006 ** Blinking cursor
2007
2008 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
2009 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
2010 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
2011 the group `cursor'.
2012
2013 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
2014
2015 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
2016 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
2017 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
2018 details.
2019
2020 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
2021 have to do anything to activate it.
2022
2023 ** The default binding of the Delete key has changed.
2024
2025 The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to
2026 determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys.
2027
2028 On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
2029 according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
2030 key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
2031 option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
2032 delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On
2033 keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two
2034 keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is
2035 set to nil, and these keys delete backward.
2036
2037 If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
2038 a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
2039 Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
2040 `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
2041 the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only
2042 terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
2043
2044 Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
2045 to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys.
2046
2047 ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
2048 changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
2049 buffer by default.
2050
2051 ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the
2052 current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the
2053 beginning and end of the buffer.
2054
2055 ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
2056 recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
2057 signaled.
2058
2059 ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
2060 file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
2061
2062 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
2063 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
2064 this behavior.
2065
2066 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte
2067 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
2068 Emacs dump core.
2069
2070 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
2071
2072 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
2073 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
2074 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
2075
2076 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
2077 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
2078 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
2079
2080 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
2081 using that menu.
2082
2083 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
2084
2085 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
2086 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
2087 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
2088 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
2089 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
2090 whitespace.
2091
2092 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
2093 all frames except the selected one.
2094
2095 ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to
2096 let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting.
2097
2098 ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs
2099 header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window),
2100 so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled.
2101 This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option
2102 `Info-use-header-line'.
2103
2104 ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
2105 have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex',
2106 `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
2107
2108 ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
2109
2110 ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
2111 `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
2112 `fr-drdref.tex'.
2113
2114 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
2115 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
2116 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
2117 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
2118
2119 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize.
2120
2121 You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path'
2122 because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still
2123 use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your
2124 `~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general.
2125
2126 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
2127 point in a pop-up window.
2128
2129 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
2130 under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or
2131 customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'.
2132
2133 The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount'
2134 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
2135
2136 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
2137 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
2138 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
2139 You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location.
2140
2141 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
2142
2143 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
2144 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
2145
2146 ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
2147 trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
2148 this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
2149
2150 ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
2151 be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is
2152 non-nil.
2153
2154 ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
2155 set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
2156 file that is already visited under a different name.
2157
2158 ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
2159 nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
2160
2161 ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
2162 and displays information about that.
2163
2164 ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
2165 expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
2166
2167 This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
2168 determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
2169 mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
2170 interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
2171 regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
2172 associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
2173
2174 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
2175 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
2176
2177 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
2178 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
2179 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
2180 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
2181 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
2182 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
2183 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
2184
2185 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
2186 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
2187
2188 ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
2189 system for keyboard input.
2190
2191 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
2192 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
2193 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
2194 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
2195 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
2196 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
2197 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
2198 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
2199 RET C-x C-f filename RET.
2200
2201 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
2202 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
2203
2204 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
2205 displays all characters in that character set.
2206
2207 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
2208 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
2209
2210 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
2211 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
2212 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
2213
2214 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
2215 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
2216 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
2217 GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have
2218 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts.
2219 There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only)
2220 and Polish `slash'.
2221
2222 ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'.
2223 These new environments mainly select appropriate translations
2224 of the tutorial.
2225
2226 ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for
2227 function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs
2228 Lisp Coding Convention".
2229
2230 new command old-binding
2231 --- ------- -----------
2232 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5
2233 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5
2234 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5
2235
2236 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged
2237 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged
2238 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged
2239
2240 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3
2241 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6
2242 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7
2243 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8
2244 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged
2245 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2
2246
2247 ** There are new Leim input methods.
2248 New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix",
2249 "greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim
2250 package.
2251
2252 ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the
2253 rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus
2254 typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating
2255 "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input
2256 "`", you must type "=q".
2257
2258 ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
2259 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
2260 more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
2261 empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
2262 window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
2263 on.
2264
2265 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
2266 on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
2267 defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
2268 commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
2269
2270 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
2271 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
2272 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
2273 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
2274
2275 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
2276 on the display using several methods
2277
2278 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
2279 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
2280 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
2281
2282 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
2283 equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
2284
2285 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
2286
2287 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
2288 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
2289
2290 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
2291 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
2292 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
2293 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
2294
2295 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
2296 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
2297 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
2298
2299 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
2300 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
2301
2302 ** New X resources recognized
2303
2304 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
2305 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
2306 is useful for debugging X problems.
2307
2308 Example:
2309
2310 emacs.synchronous: true
2311
2312 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
2313 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
2314 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
2315 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
2316 visual class names are
2317
2318 TrueColor
2319 PseudoColor
2320 DirectColor
2321 StaticColor
2322 GrayScale
2323 StaticGray
2324
2325 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
2326 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
2327 meaning.
2328
2329 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
2330 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
2331 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
2332 visual.
2333
2334 Example:
2335
2336 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
2337
2338 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
2339 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
2340 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
2341 resource values are `true' or `on'.
2342
2343 Example:
2344
2345 emacs.privateColormap: true
2346
2347 ** Faces and frame parameters.
2348
2349 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
2350 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
2351 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
2352 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
2353 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
2354 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
2355 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
2356
2357 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
2358 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
2359 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
2360 `default' face and vice versa.
2361
2362 ** New face `menu'.
2363
2364 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
2365
2366 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
2367
2368 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
2369 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
2370 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
2371 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
2372
2373 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
2374 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
2375 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
2376
2377 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
2378 `ScreenGamma'.
2379
2380 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
2381
2382 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
2383 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
2384 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
2385 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
2386
2387 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
2388
2389 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
2390
2391 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
2392
2393 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
2394 LessTif/Motif one.
2395
2396 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
2397 LessTif and Motif.
2398
2399 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
2400
2401 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
2402 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
2403 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
2404
2405 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
2406 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less).
2407
2408 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
2409 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
2410 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
2411
2412 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
2413
2414 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
2415 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
2416 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
2417 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
2418
2419 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
2420 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a
2421 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
2422 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
2423
2424 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
2425 M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
2426 M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
2427 buffers.
2428
2429 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
2430
2431 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
2432 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
2433 `directory-abbrev-alist'.
2434
2435 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
2436 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
2437 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
2438 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
2439 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
2440 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
2441
2442 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
2443
2444 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
2445 notably at the end of lines.
2446
2447 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
2448 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
2449
2450 ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'.
2451
2452 ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle',
2453 but inserts text instead of replacing it.
2454
2455 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
2456 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
2457 after each match to get the replacement text.
2458
2459 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
2460 you edit the replacement string.
2461
2462 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB'
2463 (if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases
2464 in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol.
2465
2466 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
2467
2468 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
2469 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
2470
2471 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
2472 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
2473 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
2474 displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
2475
2476 --
2477 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
2478 read mail from the menu etc.
2479
2480 ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows.
2481 This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on
2482 MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made
2483 before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now.
2484
2485 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
2486 MS-DOS version of Emacs.
2487
2488 ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version
2489 of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons.
2490 This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons
2491 correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons,
2492 but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version
2493 of Emacs.
2494
2495 ** Customize changes
2496
2497 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
2498 `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to
2499 M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that
2500 customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in
2501 earlier versions of Emacs.
2502
2503 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
2504 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
2505 default).
2506
2507 *** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
2508 does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init
2509 file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would
2510 wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init
2511 file.
2512
2513 ** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
2514 does not save disabled and enabled commands for future sessions, to
2515 avoid overwriting existing customizations of this kind that are
2516 already in your init file.
2517
2518 ** New features in evaluation commands
2519
2520 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
2521 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
2522 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new
2523 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
2524 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
2525
2526 The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4
2527 respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most
2528 the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if
2529 the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is
2530 printed).
2531
2532 <RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated
2533 printed representation and an unabbreviated one.
2534
2535 The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error
2536 during evaluation produces a backtrace.
2537
2538 *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
2539 code when called with a prefix argument.
2540
2541 ** CC mode changes.
2542
2543 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
2544 current user setups (although it's believed that these
2545 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
2546 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
2547 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
2548 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
2549 release.
2550
2551 *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone.
2552 CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode
2553 is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much
2554 confusion.
2555
2556 However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the
2557 default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for
2558 java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't
2559 notice the change if you haven't touched that variable.
2560
2561 *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall.
2562 Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list:
2563
2564 space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening
2565 parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)".
2566
2567 compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening
2568 parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function.
2569 It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the
2570 style "foo (bar)" and "foo()".
2571
2572 *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation.
2573 Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made
2574 "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an
2575 earlier statement. An example:
2576
2577 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
2578 if (a[i])
2579 res += a[i]->offset;
2580 else
2581
2582 Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it
2583 continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after
2584 the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's
2585 possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of
2586 the preceding "if".
2587
2588 CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on
2589 by default.
2590
2591 *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings.
2592 Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which
2593 meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing
2594 documentation or other natural language text.
2595
2596 The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that
2597 contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in
2598 the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline
2599 strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed
2600 to other strings that typically contain format specifications,
2601 commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses
2602 sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway.
2603
2604 *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode.
2605 Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the
2606 source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in
2607 comment prefixes and paragraph starts.
2608
2609 *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific.
2610 When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment
2611 line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This
2612 change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in
2613 Pike mode only.
2614
2615 *** Better handling of syntactic errors.
2616 The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been
2617 improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message
2618 stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the
2619 following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no
2620 matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while
2621 indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error
2622 is reported afterwards.
2623
2624 *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns.
2625 A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by
2626 returning a vector with the desired column as the first element.
2627
2628 *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation.
2629 Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending
2630 on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now
2631 can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some
2632 code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the
2633 modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the
2634 groundwork.
2635
2636 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
2637 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
2638 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
2639 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
2640 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
2641 have to bother.
2642
2643 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
2644 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
2645 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
2646 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
2647 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
2648 by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
2649
2650 *** New initialization procedure for the style system.
2651 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
2652 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
2653 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
2654 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
2655 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
2656 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
2657 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
2658
2659 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
2660 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
2661 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
2662 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
2663 above.
2664
2665 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
2666 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
2667 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
2668 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
2669 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
2670 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
2671 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
2672 function documentation for more info.
2673
2674 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
2675 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
2676 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
2677 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
2678 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
2679 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
2680 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
2681 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
2682
2683 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
2684
2685 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
2686 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
2687
2688 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
2689 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
2690 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
2691 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
2692 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
2693 style system.
2694
2695 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
2696 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
2697 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
2698 as far as possible.
2699
2700 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
2701 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
2702 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
2703 chapter about this in the manual.
2704
2705 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
2706 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
2707 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
2708 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
2709 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
2710
2711 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
2712 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
2713 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
2714
2715 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
2716 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
2717
2718 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
2719 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
2720 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
2721 inside CC Mode.
2722
2723 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
2724 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
2725 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
2726 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
2727 cc-mode/).
2728
2729 **** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and
2730 `c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and
2731 enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the
2732 function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as
2733 they were before the filling.
2734
2735 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
2736 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
2737 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
2738 literals.
2739
2740 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
2741 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
2742 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
2743 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
2744 this function.
2745
2746 *** Fixes to IDL mode.
2747 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
2748 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
2749 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
2750 Thanks to Eric Eide.
2751
2752 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
2753 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
2754 opening braces hangs and when they don't.
2755
2756 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
2757
2758 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
2759 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
2760 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
2761 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
2762
2763 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
2764 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
2765 the column specified by comment-column.
2766
2767 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
2768 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
2769 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
2770 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
2771 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
2772 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
2773
2774 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
2775 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
2776 arguments.
2777
2778 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
2779
2780 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
2781 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
2782 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
2783 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
2784 Provan).
2785
2786 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
2787
2788 ** Dired changes
2789
2790 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
2791 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
2792 is, delete only empty directories.
2793
2794 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
2795 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
2796 copy directories recursively.
2797
2798 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
2799 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
2800 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
2801
2802 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
2803 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
2804 directory.
2805
2806 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows
2807 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
2808 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
2809 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
2810 accurate or inaccurate as it is.
2811
2812 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
2813 from ls switches.
2814
2815 *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
2816 of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
2817 which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
2818 source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
2819
2820 ** Gnus changes.
2821
2822 The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
2823 four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
2824 internationalization and mail-fetching.
2825
2826 *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
2827 many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
2828
2829 If you used procmail like in
2830
2831 (setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
2832 (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
2833 (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
2834 (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
2835
2836 this now has changed to
2837
2838 (setq mail-sources
2839 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
2840 :suffix ".in")))
2841
2842 More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
2843 Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
2844
2845 *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
2846 Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
2847 Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
2848 longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
2849
2850 The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
2851 use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
2852 installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
2853
2854 *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
2855 parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
2856 are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
2857 now just a compatibility layer.
2858
2859 *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
2860 Gnus facilities.
2861
2862 *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
2863 called to position point.
2864
2865 *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
2866 summary buffers and NOV files.
2867
2868 *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
2869 of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
2870
2871 *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
2872 subtly different manner.
2873
2874 *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
2875 and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
2876 ever-changing layouts.
2877
2878 *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
2879
2880 *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
2881
2882 ** Changes in Texinfo mode.
2883
2884 *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
2885 macros
2886
2887 Key binding Macro
2888 -------------------------
2889 C-c C-c C-s @strong
2890 C-c C-c C-e @emph
2891 C-c C-c u @uref
2892 C-c C-c q @quotation
2893 C-c C-c m @email
2894 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
2895 M-RET @item
2896
2897 *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
2898
2899 ** Changes in Outline mode.
2900
2901 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
2902 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
2903 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
2904
2905 ** Changes to Emacs Server
2906
2907 *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
2908 with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
2909 are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
2910 Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
2911 buffers to kill, as before.
2912
2913 Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
2914 i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
2915 this way.
2916
2917 ** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options
2918 of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE.
2919
2920 ** Changes to Show Paren mode.
2921
2922 *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
2923 The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
2924 use. Default is 1000.
2925
2926 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
2927 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
2928
2929 ** Changes to hideshow.el
2930
2931 *** Generalized block selection and traversal
2932
2933 A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings),
2934 and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp
2935 serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate.
2936 See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'.
2937
2938 *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active,
2939 hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can
2940 be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of
2941 the open block.
2942
2943 *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a
2944 function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of
2945 the normal block-hiding function.
2946
2947 *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed.
2948
2949 *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions,
2950 roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix
2951 for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation
2952 for `hs-minor-mode'.
2953
2954 *** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and
2955 hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t.
2956
2957 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
2958
2959 *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
2960 an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
2961 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
2962
2963 **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
2964 current buffer.
2965
2966 *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
2967 in a log file.
2968
2969 *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
2970 entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
2971 Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
2972 version number is performed based on regular expressions from
2973 `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized.
2974 Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
2975
2976 *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
2977
2978 ** Changes to cmuscheme
2979
2980 *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
2981 `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
2982
2983 ** Changes in Font Lock
2984
2985 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
2986 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
2987
2988 *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should
2989 set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults.
2990
2991 *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
2992 the face used for each string/comment.
2993
2994 *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
2995 Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
2996
2997 ** Changes to Shell mode
2998
2999 *** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer
3000 to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a
3001 non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a
3002 prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name).
3003
3004 ** Comint (subshell) changes
3005
3006 These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
3007 include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
3008
3009 *** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters.
3010 Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and
3011 BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the
3012 beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character,
3013 respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to
3014 the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default.
3015
3016 *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
3017 to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
3018 parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
3019 user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
3020 this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
3021 respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
3022 feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
3023 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
3024
3025 *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
3026 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
3027
3028 *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
3029 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
3030 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
3031
3032 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
3033 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
3034 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
3035
3036 *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
3037 and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
3038 see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
3039
3040 *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
3041 saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
3042 argument, it appends to the file.
3043
3044 *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
3045 (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
3046 compatibility.
3047
3048 *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
3049 ring (history).
3050
3051 *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
3052 identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
3053 strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
3054
3055 ** Changes to Rmail mode
3056
3057 *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
3058 set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when
3059 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
3060 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
3061 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
3062 as correspondent.
3063
3064 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
3065 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
3066 regexp matching your mail addresses.
3067
3068 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
3069 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
3070 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
3071 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
3072 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
3073
3074 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
3075 like `j'.
3076
3077 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
3078 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
3079 digest message.
3080
3081 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
3082 in which folder to put messages automatically.
3083
3084 *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message
3085 with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly
3086 due to missing or malformed "charset=" header.
3087
3088 ** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify
3089 an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address.
3090
3091 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
3092 use the -f option when sending mail.
3093
3094 ** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the
3095 current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in
3096 the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'.
3097 This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded
3098 by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be
3099 displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file.
3100
3101 If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system
3102 other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable
3103 `rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system.
3104
3105 ** Changes to TeX mode
3106
3107 *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
3108 `latex-mode'.
3109
3110 *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
3111
3112 *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
3113
3114 *** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
3115
3116 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
3117
3118 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
3119 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
3120 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
3121 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
3122 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
3123 can be edited from that buffer.
3124
3125 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
3126 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
3127 `A' to use all marked entries).
3128
3129 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
3130 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
3131
3132 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
3133 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
3134 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
3135 been cited.
3136
3137 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
3138 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
3139 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
3140 in column 1 are always made leaves.
3141
3142 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
3143 has the following new features:
3144
3145 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
3146 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
3147 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
3148 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
3149
3150 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
3151 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
3152 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
3153 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
3154 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
3155 defaults to 1.
3156
3157 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
3158 file names.
3159
3160 ** Ispell changes
3161
3162 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
3163 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
3164 spell-checks the current buffer.
3165
3166 *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
3167 added.
3168
3169 *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
3170 correction is made and re-checked.
3171
3172 *** An Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definition has been added.
3173
3174 *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
3175 cases.
3176
3177 *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
3178 on syntax errors.
3179
3180 *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
3181 end of the buffer.
3182
3183 *** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
3184
3185 ** Makefile mode changes
3186
3187 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
3188
3189 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
3190 Fontlock mode is active.
3191
3192 ** Isearch changes
3193
3194 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
3195 so that searches can be resumed.
3196
3197 *** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
3198 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
3199 that started the search.
3200
3201 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
3202 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
3203
3204 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
3205
3206 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
3207 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
3208 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
3209 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
3210 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
3211 `secondary-selection'.
3212
3213 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
3214 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
3215 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
3216 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
3217 usual snappy response.
3218
3219 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
3220 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
3221 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
3222 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
3223
3224 ** VC Changes
3225
3226 VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
3227 easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
3228 Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
3229 to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
3230 changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
3231 `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify
3232 version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
3233 each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
3234 file is registered in that backend.
3235
3236 When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
3237 backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
3238 directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
3239 master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
3240 the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
3241 As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
3242
3243 The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
3244 still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
3245 RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
3246 vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
3247 where it doesn't make sense.)
3248
3249 The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
3250 obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
3251 `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
3252
3253 *** General Changes
3254
3255 The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
3256 checks are always done now.
3257
3258 VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
3259 operations.
3260
3261 `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
3262 `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
3263 `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
3264
3265 The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
3266 first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
3267 current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
3268 the working file (``merge news'').
3269
3270 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
3271 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
3272 downwards.
3273
3274 *** Multiple Backends
3275
3276 VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
3277 useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
3278 repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
3279 commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
3280 local RCS archives.
3281
3282 To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
3283 should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
3284 backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
3285 `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
3286
3287 You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing
3288 C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as
3289 a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend
3290 if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the
3291 current revision number from the more remote backend.
3292
3293 If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
3294 another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
3295 any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
3296 pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
3297
3298 After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
3299 changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
3300 local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
3301 buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
3302
3303 *** Changes for CVS
3304
3305 There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
3306 default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
3307 remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
3308 by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
3309 regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
3310 that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
3311 queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
3312
3313 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
3314 repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
3315 revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
3316 any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
3317 backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
3318 number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
3319 (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
3320 of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
3321 the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
3322 automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
3323 since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
3324 name.)
3325
3326 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
3327 repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
3328 If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
3329 commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
3330 current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
3331 entire directory tree.
3332
3333 The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
3334 "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
3335 is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
3336 "watched" by other developers.)
3337
3338 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
3339 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
3340 an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
3341 starting at the given directory.
3342
3343 *** Lisp Changes in VC
3344
3345 VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
3346 add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
3347 library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
3348 then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
3349 a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which
3350 provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top
3351 of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
3352 you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol
3353 `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
3354
3355 ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT
3356 SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more
3357 terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs.
3358 See etc/edt-user.doc for more information.
3359
3360 ** New modes and packages
3361
3362 *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
3363 automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
3364 the default is not applicable.
3365
3366 *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
3367 rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
3368 shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
3369
3370 Features are:
3371
3372 - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
3373 drawn, like this: | \ /
3374 --+-- X
3375 | / \
3376
3377 - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
3378 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
3379 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
3380 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
3381 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
3382 you are drawing.
3383
3384 - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
3385 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
3386
3387 - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
3388 flood-filling.
3389
3390 - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
3391 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
3392 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
3393 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
3394
3395 - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
3396 also do without the mouse.
3397
3398 - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
3399 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
3400 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
3401 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
3402 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
3403
3404 - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
3405
3406 lines straight-lines
3407 rectangles squares
3408 poly-lines straight poly-lines
3409 ellipses circles
3410 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
3411 spray-can setting size for spraying
3412 vaporize line vaporize lines
3413 erase characters erase rectangles
3414
3415 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
3416 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
3417 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
3418 drawing.
3419
3420 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
3421 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
3422 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
3423 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
3424
3425 - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
3426 can be turned off).
3427
3428 *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
3429 implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
3430 It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
3431 functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
3432 history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
3433 will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
3434 the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
3435 rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
3436 all within the scope of your Emacs process.
3437
3438 *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
3439 intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
3440 typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
3441 on certain projects.
3442
3443 *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches
3444 of interactively entered regexps. For example,
3445
3446 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
3447
3448 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
3449 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
3450 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
3451 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
3452 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
3453 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
3454 corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches
3455 to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match.
3456
3457 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
3458 Emacs is idle.
3459
3460 *** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text
3461 fragments in accordance with the current major mode.
3462
3463 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
3464 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
3465
3466 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
3467 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
3468 be more robust while offering the same functionality.
3469 `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
3470 comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
3471
3472 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
3473 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
3474 separate Texinfo file.
3475
3476 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
3477 by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
3478 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
3479 `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
3480 enter check-in log messages.
3481
3482 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
3483 without invoking external programs.
3484
3485 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
3486 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
3487 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
3488 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
3489 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
3490
3491 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
3492 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
3493
3494 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
3495 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
3496
3497 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
3498 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
3499 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
3500 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
3501 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
3502 single step.
3503
3504 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
3505 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
3506 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
3507 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
3508
3509 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
3510 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
3511 actually modifying content of a buffer.
3512
3513 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
3514 PostScript.
3515
3516 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
3517
3518 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
3519
3520 ; comment (until end of line)
3521 A non-terminal
3522 "C" terminal
3523 ?C? special
3524 $A default non-terminal
3525 $"C" default terminal
3526 $?C? default special
3527 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
3528 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
3529 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
3530 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
3531 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
3532 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
3533 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
3534 C+ one or more occurrences of C
3535 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
3536 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
3537 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
3538 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
3539 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
3540 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
3541 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
3542
3543 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
3544
3545 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
3546 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
3547 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
3548 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
3549 equal signs of assignments.
3550
3551 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
3552 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
3553
3554 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
3555 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
3556 buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'.
3557
3558 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
3559
3560 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
3561 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
3562 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
3563 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
3564 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
3565 which answers different needs.
3566
3567 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
3568 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
3569 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
3570 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
3571 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
3572 to be enabled.
3573
3574 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
3575 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
3576
3577 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
3578
3579 *** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the
3580 current line in the current buffer. It also provides
3581 `global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behavior in all buffers.
3582
3583 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
3584
3585 Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and
3586 `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
3587 disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
3588 `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
3589 displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
3590 and background colors.
3591
3592 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
3593 Pascal) language.
3594
3595 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
3596 the text at point.
3597
3598 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
3599
3600 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
3601
3602 *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus
3603 whitespace in a file.
3604
3605 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
3606 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
3607 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
3608 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
3609 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
3610 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
3611 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
3612
3613 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
3614
3615 Here is an example of columns:
3616
3617 horse apple bus
3618 dog pineapple car EXTRA
3619 porcupine strawberry airplane
3620
3621 Doing the following settings:
3622
3623 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
3624 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
3625 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
3626 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
3627
3628
3629 Selecting the lines above and typing:
3630
3631 M-x delimit-columns-region
3632
3633 It results:
3634
3635 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
3636 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
3637 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
3638
3639 delim-col has the following options:
3640
3641 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
3642 before all columns.
3643
3644 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
3645 between each column.
3646
3647 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
3648 after all columns.
3649
3650 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
3651 each column.
3652
3653 delim-col has the following commands:
3654
3655 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
3656 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
3657
3658 *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were
3659 operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a
3660 menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the
3661 recent file list can be displayed:
3662
3663 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
3664 - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending.
3665 - showing paths relative to the current default-directory
3666
3667 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
3668 dynamically change the menu appearance.
3669
3670 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
3671 text.
3672
3673 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
3674 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
3675 specific to Message mode.
3676
3677 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
3678 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
3679 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
3680
3681 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
3682 interface to access directory servers using different directory
3683 protocols. It has a separate manual.
3684
3685 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
3686 for Autoconf, selected automatically.
3687
3688 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
3689
3690 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
3691 minibuffer with completion.
3692
3693 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
3694 with the diary features.
3695
3696 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
3697 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
3698
3699 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
3700 Fill mode.
3701
3702 *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
3703 facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
3704 difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
3705 they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
3706
3707 *** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files.
3708 It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension
3709 `.g'.
3710
3711 ** Changes in sort.el
3712
3713 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
3714 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
3715 new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
3716 numeric base.
3717
3718 ** Changes to Ange-ftp
3719
3720 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
3721 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
3722 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
3723
3724 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
3725 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
3726
3727 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
3728 output ^M at the end of lines.
3729
3730 ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
3731 mode `iswitchb-mode'.
3732
3733 ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore.
3734 If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with
3735 `(msb-mode 1)'.
3736
3737 ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom
3738 group.
3739
3740 ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the
3741 behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values
3742 are recognized:
3743
3744 `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space;
3745 `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces;
3746 `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines;
3747 nil -- just delete one character.
3748
3749 Default value is `untabify'.
3750
3751 [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.]
3752
3753 ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
3754 symbol, not double-quoted.
3755
3756 ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
3757 version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
3758 profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been
3759 moved to lisp/obsolete.
3760
3761 ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
3762 To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
3763 `auto-compression-mode' command.
3764
3765 ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
3766 `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and
3767 `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser.
3768
3769 ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to
3770 `browse-url-new-window-flag'.
3771
3772 ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
3773 operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
3774
3775 ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
3776 is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
3777
3778 ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
3779 support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
3780 use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
3781 buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
3782 M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
3783 new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
3784
3785 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
3786 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
3787
3788 ** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters.
3789
3790 The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the
3791 file you are visiting in Hexl mode.
3792
3793 ** Shell script mode changes.
3794
3795 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
3796 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and
3797 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
3798
3799 ** Etags changes.
3800
3801 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
3802
3803 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
3804 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
3805 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
3806 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
3807 a regular expression. The manual contains details.
3808
3809 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
3810 declarations when given the --declarations option.
3811
3812 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
3813 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
3814
3815 *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags
3816 automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or
3817 `template' keywords.
3818
3819 *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in
3820 C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels.
3821
3822 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
3823 types.
3824
3825 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
3826
3827 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
3828
3829 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
3830 are now tagged.
3831
3832 *** In makefiles, tags the targets.
3833
3834 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
3835 variables are tagged.
3836
3837 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
3838
3839 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
3840 for PSWrap.
3841
3842 ** Changes in etags.el
3843
3844 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
3845 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
3846 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
3847
3848 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
3849 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
3850
3851 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
3852 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
3853 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
3854 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
3855
3856 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
3857
3858 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
3859 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
3860
3861 A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
3862
3863 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
3864 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
3865 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
3866
3867 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
3868 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
3869
3870 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
3871 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
3872
3873 *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
3874 If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
3875 /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
3876 "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name,
3877 point will go to the beginning of the file.
3878
3879 *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if
3880 auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search
3881 (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files.
3882
3883 *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point
3884 in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is
3885 found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring.
3886
3887 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
3888 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
3889 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
3890
3891 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
3892
3893 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
3894
3895 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
3896 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
3897 expression from that list, are not checked.
3898
3899 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
3900 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
3901 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
3902 the buffer, just like for the local files.
3903
3904 ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
3905
3906 ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
3907 displays local abbrevs, only.
3908
3909 ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
3910 paragraphs filled as you modify them.
3911
3912 ** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse
3913 may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value
3914 is measured in pixels.
3915
3916 ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
3917 to be visited as images.
3918
3919 ** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command'
3920 were added to compile.el.
3921
3922 ** Withdrawn packages
3923
3924 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
3925 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
3926
3927 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
3928
3929 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
3930
3931
3932 * Incompatible Lisp changes
3933
3934 There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
3935 may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
3936 See the sections below for details.
3937
3938 ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
3939 `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties.
3940 Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties'
3941 to remove the properties of the copy.
3942
3943 ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
3944 which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
3945 may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
3946 these properties are active.
3947
3948 ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
3949 ranges may affect some code.
3950
3951 ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
3952 buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
3953 make a difference to some code.
3954
3955 ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
3956 operates on the minibuffer.
3957
3958 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
3959 cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
3960 different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
3961 (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
3962 Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
3963 character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
3964 multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
3965 encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
3966 reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
3967 sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
3968 a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
3969 the buffer as multibyte characters.
3970
3971 Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
3972 MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
3973 appropriate for reading truly binary files.
3974
3975 ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
3976 `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use
3977 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead.
3978
3979 ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
3980 long promised. So does any code that uses derivatives of `concat',
3981 such as `mapconcat'.
3982
3983 ** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte
3984 string.
3985
3986 ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of
3987 extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new
3988 dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than
3989 one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard
3990 charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes
3991 the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule
3992 encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will
3993 probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21.
3994
3995 ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal.
3996 Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be
3997 aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should
3998 not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and
3999 on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the
4000 behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It
4001 turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to
4002 remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well
4003 advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value
4004 will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed.
4005
4006
4007 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
4008 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
4009
4010 ** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all.
4011
4012 ** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el
4013 allows the animated display of strings.
4014
4015 ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the
4016 interactive form of a function.
4017
4018 ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
4019 between custom options. Example:
4020
4021 (defcustom default-input-method nil
4022 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
4023 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
4024 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
4025 :group 'mule
4026 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
4027 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
4028
4029 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
4030 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
4031 first in a custom-set-variables statement.
4032
4033 ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of
4034 function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
4035 args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
4036 (signal or normal termination).
4037
4038 ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
4039 from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
4040
4041 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
4042 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
4043
4044 ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
4045 alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
4046
4047 ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4048
4049 ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
4050 deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
4051 being deleted.
4052
4053 ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
4054
4055 ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
4056 If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
4057 skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
4058 with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
4059 C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
4060 charset.
4061
4062 ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
4063 the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
4064 message.
4065
4066 ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
4067 expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
4068
4069 ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
4070 with the more general `:mask' property.
4071
4072 ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's.
4073
4074 ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
4075 backslash.
4076
4077 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
4078 is running in batch mode. For example,
4079
4080 (message "%s" (read t))
4081
4082 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
4083 to standard output.
4084
4085 ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
4086 `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
4087
4088 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
4089 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
4090 frame or window.
4091
4092 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
4093 were added
4094
4095 - Function: remove ELT SEQ
4096
4097 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
4098 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
4099
4100 - Function: remq ELT LIST
4101
4102 Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The
4103 comparison is done with `eq'.
4104
4105 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
4106
4107 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
4108 has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and
4109 `key-and-value', in addition the `nil', `key', `value', and `t'.
4110
4111 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
4112 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
4113 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
4114
4115 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
4116 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
4117
4118 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
4119 function was declared obsolete.
4120
4121 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
4122 retained as an alias).
4123
4124 ** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
4125 It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
4126 is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
4127
4128 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined
4129
4130 - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
4131
4132 Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
4133 omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
4134 the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
4135 even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
4136 minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
4137 means never include the minibuffer window.
4138
4139 ** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows
4140
4141 - Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
4142
4143 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
4144
4145 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
4146 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
4147 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
4148 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
4149 returned.
4150
4151 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
4152 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
4153 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
4154 minibuffer even if it is active.
4155
4156 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
4157 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
4158 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
4159 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
4160 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
4161 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
4162
4163 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
4164 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
4165 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
4166 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
4167 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
4168 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
4169 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
4170
4171 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
4172 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
4173 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
4174
4175 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
4176 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
4177 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
4178 Default value is nil.
4179
4180 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
4181 meaning no limit.
4182
4183 ** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls
4184 the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line
4185 numbers in the mode line. The default is 200.
4186
4187 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
4188 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
4189 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
4190
4191 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
4192 list of a primitive.
4193
4194 ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
4195
4196 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
4197 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
4198 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
4199 than replacing the local map.
4200
4201 ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and
4202 `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been
4203 removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions'
4204 instead.
4205
4206 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
4207
4208 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
4209 as promised long ago.
4210
4211 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
4212
4213 ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems
4214 for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but
4215 patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names.
4216
4217
4218 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
4219
4220 ** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for
4221 regular expressions.
4222
4223 - Function: rx-to-string SEXP
4224
4225 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
4226
4227 - Macro: rx SEXP
4228
4229 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
4230
4231 The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp
4232 notation.
4233
4234 STRING
4235 matches string STRING literally.
4236
4237 CHAR
4238 matches character CHAR literally.
4239
4240 `not-newline'
4241 matches any character except a newline.
4242 .
4243 `anything'
4244 matches any character
4245
4246 `(any SET)'
4247 matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string.
4248 Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings.
4249
4250 '(in SET)'
4251 like `any'.
4252
4253 `(not (any SET))'
4254 matches any character not in SET
4255
4256 `line-start'
4257 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line
4258 in the text being matched
4259
4260 `line-end'
4261 is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line
4262
4263 `string-start'
4264 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
4265 string being matched against.
4266
4267 `string-end'
4268 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
4269 string being matched against.
4270
4271 `buffer-start'
4272 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
4273 buffer being matched against.
4274
4275 `buffer-end'
4276 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
4277 buffer being matched against.
4278
4279 `point'
4280 matches the empty string, but only at point.
4281
4282 `word-start'
4283 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
4284 word.
4285
4286 `word-end'
4287 matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word.
4288
4289 `word-boundary'
4290 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
4291 word.
4292
4293 `(not word-boundary)'
4294 matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a
4295 word.
4296
4297 `digit'
4298 matches 0 through 9.
4299
4300 `control'
4301 matches ASCII control characters.
4302
4303 `hex-digit'
4304 matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
4305
4306 `blank'
4307 matches space and tab only.
4308
4309 `graphic'
4310 matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
4311 space, and DEL.
4312
4313 `printing'
4314 matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
4315 and DEL.
4316
4317 `alphanumeric'
4318 matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
4319 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
4320
4321 `letter'
4322 matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
4323 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
4324
4325 `ascii'
4326 matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
4327
4328 `nonascii'
4329 matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
4330
4331 `lower'
4332 matches anything lower-case.
4333
4334 `upper'
4335 matches anything upper-case.
4336
4337 `punctuation'
4338 matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
4339 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
4340
4341 `space'
4342 matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
4343
4344 `word'
4345 matches anything that has word syntax.
4346
4347 `(syntax SYNTAX)'
4348 matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one
4349 of the following symbols.
4350
4351 `whitespace' (\\s- in string notation)
4352 `punctuation' (\\s.)
4353 `word' (\\sw)
4354 `symbol' (\\s_)
4355 `open-parenthesis' (\\s()
4356 `close-parenthesis' (\\s))
4357 `expression-prefix' (\\s')
4358 `string-quote' (\\s\")
4359 `paired-delimiter' (\\s$)
4360 `escape' (\\s\\)
4361 `character-quote' (\\s/)
4362 `comment-start' (\\s<)
4363 `comment-end' (\\s>)
4364
4365 `(not (syntax SYNTAX))'
4366 matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX.
4367
4368 `(category CATEGORY)'
4369 matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be
4370 either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols.
4371
4372 `consonant' (\\c0 in string notation)
4373 `base-vowel' (\\c1)
4374 `upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2)
4375 `lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3)
4376 `tone-mark' (\\c4)
4377 `symbol' (\\c5)
4378 `digit' (\\c6)
4379 `vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7)
4380 `vowel-sign' (\\c8)
4381 `semivowel-lower' (\\c9)
4382 `not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<)
4383 `not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>)
4384 `alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA)
4385 `chinse-two-byte' (\\cC)
4386 `greek-two-byte' (\\cG)
4387 `japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH)
4388 `indian-tow-byte' (\\cI)
4389 `japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK)
4390 `korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN)
4391 `cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY)
4392 `ascii' (\\ca)
4393 `arabic' (\\cb)
4394 `chinese' (\\cc)
4395 `ethiopic' (\\ce)
4396 `greek' (\\cg)
4397 `korean' (\\ch)
4398 `indian' (\\ci)
4399 `japanese' (\\cj)
4400 `japanese-katakana' (\\ck)
4401 `latin' (\\cl)
4402 `lao' (\\co)
4403 `tibetan' (\\cq)
4404 `japanese-roman' (\\cr)
4405 `thai' (\\ct)
4406 `vietnamese' (\\cv)
4407 `hebrew' (\\cw)
4408 `cyrillic' (\\cy)
4409 `can-break' (\\c|)
4410
4411 `(not (category CATEGORY))'
4412 matches a character that has not category CATEGORY.
4413
4414 `(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
4415 matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc.
4416
4417 `(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
4418 like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end',
4419 `match-beginning', and `match-string'.
4420
4421 `(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
4422 another name for `submatch'.
4423
4424 `(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
4425 matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all
4426 args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting
4427 regular expression.
4428
4429 `(minimal-match SEXP)'
4430 produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching
4431 zero or more occurrences of something are \"greedy\" in that they
4432 match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can
4433 still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible.
4434
4435 `(maximal-match SEXP)'
4436 produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default.
4437
4438 `(zero-or-more SEXP)'
4439 matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches.
4440
4441 `(0+ SEXP)'
4442 like `zero-or-more'.
4443
4444 `(* SEXP)'
4445 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
4446
4447 `(*? SEXP)'
4448 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
4449
4450 `(one-or-more SEXP)'
4451 matches one or more occurrences of A.
4452
4453 `(1+ SEXP)'
4454 like `one-or-more'.
4455
4456 `(+ SEXP)'
4457 like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
4458
4459 `(+? SEXP)'
4460 like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
4461
4462 `(zero-or-one SEXP)'
4463 matches zero or one occurrences of A.
4464
4465 `(optional SEXP)'
4466 like `zero-or-one'.
4467
4468 `(? SEXP)'
4469 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp.
4470
4471 `(?? SEXP)'
4472 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
4473
4474 `(repeat N SEXP)'
4475 matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches.
4476
4477 `(repeat N M SEXP)'
4478 matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches.
4479
4480 `(eval FORM)'
4481 evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string,
4482 `regexp-quote' it.
4483
4484 `(regexp REGEXP)'
4485 include REGEXP in string notation in the result.
4486
4487 *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default.
4488
4489 *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
4490 buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
4491 the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
4492 restriction to be restored incorrectly.
4493
4494 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
4495 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
4496 when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a
4497 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
4498
4499 *** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and
4500 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string
4501 if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
4502
4503 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
4504 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
4505 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
4506 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
4507 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
4508 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
4509 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
4510 eight-bit-graphic.
4511
4512 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
4513
4514 A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for
4515 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
4516 character set as previously.
4517
4518 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
4519 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
4520 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
4521
4522 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
4523 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
4524 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
4525 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
4526
4527 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
4528 name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font.
4529
4530 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
4531 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
4532 "fontset-default".
4533
4534 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
4535 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
4536
4537 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
4538 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
4539 buffers and strings.
4540
4541 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
4542 character' which is an independent character with a unique character
4543 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
4544 have been deleted: composite-char-component,
4545 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
4546 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
4547 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
4548 also been deleted.
4549
4550 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
4551 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
4552 `reference-point-alist' for more detail.
4553
4554 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
4555 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
4556 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
4557 may differ between buffer and string text.
4558
4559 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
4560 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
4561
4562 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
4563 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
4564 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
4565 `composition' from STRING.
4566
4567 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
4568 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
4569
4570 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
4571 obsolete.
4572
4573 ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on
4574 the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text.
4575
4576 ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
4577 `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been
4578 introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF,
4579 U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
4580
4581 Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so
4582 characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew,
4583 etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are
4584 different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text
4585 which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be
4586 encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system.
4587
4588 ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added.
4589 It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For
4590 details, please see the documentation string of this coding system.
4591
4592 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
4593 `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese
4594 standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
4595
4596 ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15'
4597 have been introduced.
4598
4599 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
4600 have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
4601 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of
4602 eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the
4603 emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the
4604 buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for
4605 eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string
4606 must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to
4607 their multibyte equivalent.
4608
4609 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
4610 that offset in the file before writing.
4611
4612 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
4613 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
4614
4615 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
4616 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
4617 from which the command was issued.
4618
4619 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
4620 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
4621 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
4622 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
4623 operate on.
4624
4625 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
4626 to `window-buffer-height'.
4627
4628 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
4629
4630 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
4631 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
4632 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
4633
4634 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
4635 respectively.
4636
4637 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument
4638 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
4639
4640 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
4641 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
4642 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
4643
4644 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
4645 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
4646 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
4647 is currently displayed in some window.
4648
4649 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
4650 argument function's results.
4651
4652 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
4653 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also,
4654 `base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs
4655 20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte
4656 sequence).
4657
4658 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
4659 header in the list of headers passed to it.
4660
4661 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
4662 ignores differences in case and text representation.
4663
4664 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
4665 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
4666 as follows:
4667
4668 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
4669 nil don't display a cursor
4670 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
4671 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
4672 others display a box cursor.
4673
4674 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
4675 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
4676 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
4677 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
4678
4679 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
4680 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
4681 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
4682 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
4683
4684 Example:
4685
4686 (string-to-syntax "()")
4687 => (4 . 41)
4688
4689 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
4690 other than 10.
4691
4692 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
4693 INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
4694
4695 #b1111
4696 => 15
4697 #b-1111
4698 => -15
4699
4700 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
4701
4702 #o666
4703 => 438
4704
4705 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
4706
4707 #xbeef
4708 => 48815
4709
4710 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
4711
4712 #2R-111
4713 => -7
4714 #25rah
4715 => 267
4716
4717 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
4718 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
4719 and isn't a string.
4720
4721 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
4722 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
4723 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
4724 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
4725
4726 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
4727
4728 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
4729 for a regexp in a string.
4730
4731 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
4732 `mouse-position-function'.
4733
4734 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
4735 that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
4736
4737 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
4738 Keywords are now always considered constants.
4739
4740 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
4741 returns it.
4742
4743 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
4744 returned by function `recent-keys'.
4745
4746 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
4747 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
4748 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a
4749 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
4750 mode.
4751
4752 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
4753 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
4754
4755 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
4756 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
4757 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
4758 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
4759 been performed."
4760
4761 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
4762 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
4763 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
4764 then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
4765
4766 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
4767 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
4768 and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
4769
4770 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
4771 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
4772 specified table.
4773
4774 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
4775
4776 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
4777 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
4778 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
4779 what BODY returns.
4780
4781 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
4782 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
4783 Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the
4784 corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
4785 Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
4786
4787 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
4788 removed since it wasn't used by anything.
4789
4790 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
4791 instead of being optional.
4792
4793 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
4794 modify read-only text.
4795
4796 ** New functions and variables for locales.
4797
4798 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
4799 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
4800 time functions like strftime. The new variables
4801 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
4802 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
4803
4804 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
4805 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
4806 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
4807 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
4808 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
4809 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
4810 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
4811
4812 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
4813 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
4814 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
4815 start sequences.
4816
4817 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
4818 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
4819
4820 ** New function `propertize'
4821
4822 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
4823 strings with text properties.
4824
4825 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
4826
4827 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
4828 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
4829 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
4830 specified value of that property. Example:
4831
4832 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
4833
4834 ** push and pop macros.
4835
4836 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
4837 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
4838 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
4839
4840 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
4841 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
4842 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
4843
4844 ** New dolist and dotimes macros.
4845
4846 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
4847 are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
4848
4849 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
4850 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
4851 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
4852 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
4853
4854 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
4855 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
4856 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
4857 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
4858
4859 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
4860 [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
4861 class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
4862 or a sign.
4863
4864 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
4865 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
4866 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
4867 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
4868 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
4869 space, and DEL.
4870 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
4871 and DEL.
4872 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
4873 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
4874 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
4875 [:alpha:] matches letters.
4876 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
4877 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
4878 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
4879 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
4880 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
4881 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
4882 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
4883 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
4884 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
4885 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
4886 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
4887
4888 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
4889
4890 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
4891
4892 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
4893
4894 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
4895 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
4896
4897 :test TEST
4898
4899 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
4900 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
4901 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
4902
4903 :size SIZE
4904
4905 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
4906 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
4907
4908 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
4909
4910 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
4911 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
4912 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
4913 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
4914 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
4915
4916 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
4917
4918 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
4919 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
4920 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
4921
4922 :weakness WEAK
4923
4924 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
4925 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
4926 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
4927 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
4928 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
4929
4930 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
4931
4932 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
4933
4934 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
4935
4936 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
4937
4938 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
4939
4940 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
4941 values are shared.
4942
4943 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
4944
4945 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
4946
4947 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
4948
4949 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
4950
4951 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
4952
4953 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
4954
4955 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
4956
4957 Returns the size of TABLE.
4958
4959 - Function: hash-table-test TABLE
4960
4961 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
4962
4963 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
4964
4965 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
4966
4967 - Function: clrhash TABLE
4968
4969 Clear TABLE.
4970
4971 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
4972
4973 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
4974 not found.
4975
4976 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
4977
4978 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
4979 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
4980
4981 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
4982
4983 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
4984
4985 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
4986
4987 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
4988 arguments KEY and VALUE.
4989
4990 - Function: sxhash OBJ
4991
4992 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
4993
4994 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
4995
4996 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
4997 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
4998 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
4999 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
5000 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
5001
5002 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
5003
5004 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
5005 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
5006 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
5007
5008 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
5009 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
5010
5011 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
5012 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
5013
5014 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
5015 (sxhash (upcase a)))
5016
5017 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
5018 'case-fold-string-hash))
5019
5020 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
5021
5022 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
5023
5024 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
5025 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
5026 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
5027
5028 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
5029
5030 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
5031 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
5032
5033 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
5034 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
5035 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
5036 is too short to reach that column.
5037
5038 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
5039 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
5040 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
5041 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
5042
5043 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
5044 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
5045 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
5046
5047 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
5048 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
5049
5050 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
5051 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
5052
5053 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
5054 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
5055 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
5056 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
5057 temporary-file-directory instead.
5058
5059 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
5060 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
5061 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
5062 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
5063
5064 ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
5065 elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value.
5066
5067 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
5068
5069 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
5070 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
5071 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
5072
5073 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
5074
5075 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
5076 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
5077 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
5078 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
5079 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
5080 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
5081
5082 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
5083 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
5084 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
5085 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
5086
5087 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
5088
5089 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
5090 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
5091 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
5092 result string.
5093
5094 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
5095 string where arguments appear in the result string.
5096
5097 Example:
5098
5099 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
5100 (s2 "world"))
5101 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
5102 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
5103 (format s1 s2))
5104
5105 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
5106
5107 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
5108
5109 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
5110 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
5111 argument in it.
5112
5113 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
5114 (arg "world"))
5115 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
5116 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
5117 (message msg arg))
5118
5119 ** Sound support
5120
5121 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
5122 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
5123
5124 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
5125 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
5126 to enable sound support.
5127
5128 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
5129 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
5130 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
5131 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
5132 sound to play, before playing the sound.
5133
5134 The following sound properties are supported:
5135
5136 - `:file FILE'
5137
5138 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
5139 searched relative to `data-directory'.
5140
5141 - `:data DATA'
5142
5143 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
5144 may be present, but not both.
5145
5146 - `:volume VOLUME'
5147
5148 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
5149 0..1. This property is optional.
5150
5151 - `:device DEVICE'
5152
5153 DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
5154 sound. The default device is system-dependent.
5155
5156 Other properties are ignored.
5157
5158 An alternative interface is called as
5159 (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
5160
5161 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
5162
5163 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
5164 a keyword symbol.
5165
5166 ** Changes to garbage collection
5167
5168 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
5169 of live and free strings.
5170
5171 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
5172 strings that have been consed so far.
5173
5174
5175 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
5176 Lisp Manual
5177
5178 ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
5179 mini-windows.
5180
5181 ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
5182 argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
5183 returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
5184
5185 ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
5186
5187 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
5188
5189 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
5190 image.
5191
5192 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
5193
5194 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
5195
5196 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
5197 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
5198 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
5199 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
5200 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
5201
5202 ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
5203 has a mask bitmap.
5204
5205 - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
5206
5207 Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
5208 FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
5209 or omitted means use the selected frame.
5210
5211 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
5212 satisfying one of a list of specifications.
5213
5214 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
5215 optional.
5216
5217 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
5218 below).
5219
5220
5221 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
5222
5223 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
5224 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
5225
5226 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
5227 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
5228 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
5229 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
5230 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
5231 just display it black instead.
5232
5233 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
5234 a line like
5235
5236 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
5237
5238 in your `.emacs'.
5239
5240 ** New face implementation.
5241
5242 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
5243 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
5244
5245 *** New faces.
5246
5247 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
5248
5249 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
5250
5251 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
5252 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
5253
5254 3. Font height in 1/10pt
5255
5256 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
5257
5258 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
5259
5260 6. Foreground color.
5261
5262 7. Background color.
5263
5264 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
5265
5266 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
5267
5268 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
5269
5270 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
5271
5272 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
5273 color.
5274
5275 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
5276 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
5277
5278 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
5279 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
5280 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
5281 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
5282 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face
5283 attributes mentioned above.
5284
5285 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
5286 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
5287 created frames.
5288
5289 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
5290 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
5291 `fully-specified'.
5292
5293 *** Face merging.
5294
5295 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
5296 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
5297 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
5298 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
5299 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
5300 results in a fully-specified face.
5301
5302 *** Face realization.
5303
5304 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
5305 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
5306 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
5307 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
5308 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
5309 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
5310
5311 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
5312 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
5313 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
5314 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
5315
5316 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
5317 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
5318 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
5319 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
5320 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
5321
5322 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
5323 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
5324 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
5325 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
5326 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
5327 Emacs.
5328
5329 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
5330 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
5331 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
5332 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
5333
5334 **** Clearing face caches.
5335
5336 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
5337 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
5338 unused fonts.
5339
5340 *** Font selection.
5341
5342 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
5343 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
5344 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
5345
5346 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
5347 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
5348 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
5349 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
5350 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
5351
5352 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
5353 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
5354 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
5355
5356 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
5357
5358 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
5359 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
5360 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
5361 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
5362 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
5363 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
5364 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
5365
5366 Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
5367 alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
5368 doesn't exist.
5369
5370 Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
5371 all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a
5372 registry.
5373
5374 Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are
5375 slightly different.
5376
5377 Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
5378
5379
5380 **** Scalable fonts
5381
5382 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
5383 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
5384 servers.
5385
5386 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
5387 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
5388 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
5389 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
5390 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
5391 that list. Example:
5392
5393 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
5394
5395 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
5396
5397 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
5398
5399 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
5400
5401 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
5402 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
5403 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
5404
5405 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
5406 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
5407 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
5408 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
5409 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
5410 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
5411 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
5412 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
5413 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
5414 of the face font sort order.
5415
5416 - Function: x-font-family-list
5417
5418 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
5419 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
5420 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
5421 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
5422
5423 - Variable: font-list-limit
5424
5425 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
5426 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
5427 matching font. The default is currently 100.
5428
5429 *** Setting face attributes.
5430
5431 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
5432 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
5433 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
5434 `face-attribute'.
5435
5436 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
5437 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
5438
5439 The following attributes are recognized:
5440
5441 `:family'
5442
5443 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
5444 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
5445 and `?' are allowed.
5446
5447 `:width'
5448
5449 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
5450 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
5451 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
5452 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
5453
5454 `:height'
5455
5456 VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
5457 in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
5458 scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
5459 height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
5460
5461 `:weight'
5462
5463 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
5464 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
5465 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
5466
5467 `:slant'
5468
5469 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
5470 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
5471 `reverse-oblique'.
5472
5473 `:foreground', `:background'
5474
5475 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
5476
5477 `:underline'
5478
5479 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
5480 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
5481 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
5482 don't underline.
5483
5484 `:overline'
5485
5486 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
5487 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
5488 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
5489 overline.
5490
5491 `:strike-through'
5492
5493 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
5494 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
5495 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
5496 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
5497
5498 `:box'
5499
5500 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
5501 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
5502 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
5503 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
5504 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
5505 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
5506 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
5507 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
5508 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
5509 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
5510 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
5511 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
5512 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
5513 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
5514 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
5515 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
5516 box.
5517
5518 `:inverse-video'
5519
5520 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
5521 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
5522
5523 `:stipple'
5524
5525 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
5526 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
5527 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
5528 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
5529 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
5530 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
5531
5532 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
5533 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
5534
5535 `:font'
5536
5537 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
5538 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
5539 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
5540 versions of Emacs.
5541
5542 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
5543 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
5544 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
5545
5546 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
5547 `defface'.
5548
5549 `:inherit'
5550
5551 VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
5552 of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
5553 like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
5554
5555 *** Face attributes and X resources
5556
5557 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
5558 from X resources:
5559
5560 Face attribute X resource class
5561 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
5562 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
5563 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
5564 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
5565 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
5566 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
5567 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
5568 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
5569 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
5570 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
5571 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
5572 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
5573 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
5574 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
5575 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
5576 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
5577 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
5578 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
5579 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
5580 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
5581
5582 *** Text property `face'.
5583
5584 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
5585 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
5586 specification can be
5587
5588 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
5589
5590 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
5591 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
5592 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
5593 for face attribute names.
5594
5595 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
5596 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
5597 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
5598
5599 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
5600
5601 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
5602 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
5603 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
5604 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
5605 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
5606 used to clear the mapping table.
5607
5608 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
5609
5610 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
5611 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
5612 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
5613 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
5614 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
5615 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
5616 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
5617 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
5618 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
5619 modify their color-related behavior.
5620
5621 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
5622 any frame type.
5623
5624 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
5625
5626 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
5627 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
5628 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
5629 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
5630 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
5631 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
5632 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
5633 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
5634 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
5635
5636 The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular
5637 display can display image files.
5638
5639 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
5640
5641 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
5642 To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
5643 the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
5644 `Inviolable' option.
5645
5646 The function `minibuffer-prompt-end' returns the current position of the
5647 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
5648 Otherwise, it returns `(point-min)'.
5649
5650 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
5651
5652 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
5653 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
5654 property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
5655
5656 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
5657 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
5658 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
5659 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
5660 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
5661 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
5662 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
5663 functions.
5664
5665 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
5666 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
5667 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
5668
5669 The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
5670
5671 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
5672
5673 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
5674
5675 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
5676 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
5677 constrained position if that is different.
5678
5679 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
5680 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
5681 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
5682 constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
5683 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
5684 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
5685 fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
5686 the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
5687 also considered to be `on the boundary'.
5688
5689 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
5690 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
5691 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
5692 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
5693 only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
5694
5695 If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
5696 a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
5697
5698 Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
5699
5700 - Function: delete-field &optional POS
5701
5702 Delete the field surrounding POS.
5703 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
5704 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
5705
5706 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
5707
5708 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
5709 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
5710 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
5711 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
5712 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
5713
5714 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
5715
5716 Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
5717 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
5718 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
5719 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
5720 then the end of the *following* field is returned.
5721
5722 - Function: field-string &optional POS
5723
5724 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
5725 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
5726 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
5727
5728 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
5729
5730 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
5731 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
5732 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
5733
5734 ** Image support.
5735
5736 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
5737 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
5738 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
5739 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
5740
5741 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
5742 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
5743 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
5744 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
5745 area.
5746
5747 IMAGE is an image specification.
5748
5749 *** Image specifications
5750
5751 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
5752 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
5753 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
5754 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
5755 described below are ignored.
5756
5757 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
5758
5759 `:ascent ASCENT'
5760
5761 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
5762 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5763 to use for its ascent.
5764
5765 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
5766 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
5767
5768 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
5769 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
5770 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
5771 overlays that apply to the image.
5772
5773 `:margin MARGIN'
5774
5775 MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put
5776 as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the
5777 horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0.
5778
5779 `:relief RELIEF'
5780
5781 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
5782 around an image.
5783
5784 `:conversion ALGO'
5785
5786 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
5787
5788 ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
5789 edge-detection algorithm to the image.
5790
5791 ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
5792 apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
5793 nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
5794 position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
5795 around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
5796 neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
5797 transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
5798 x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
5799 below.
5800
5801 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
5802 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
5803 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
5804
5805 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
5806 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
5807 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
5808 of the factors' absolute values.
5809
5810 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
5811
5812 (1 0 0
5813 0 0 0
5814 9 9 -1)
5815
5816 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
5817
5818 ( 2 -1 0
5819 -1 0 1
5820 0 1 -2)
5821
5822 ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
5823 ``disabled''.
5824
5825 `:mask MASK'
5826
5827 If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
5828 the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
5829 image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
5830 background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
5831 image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is
5832 the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
5833 GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
5834 image.
5835
5836 If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
5837 in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
5838 `:mask nil'.
5839
5840 `:file FILE'
5841
5842 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
5843 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
5844 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
5845 may be present in the image specification.
5846
5847 `:data DATA'
5848
5849 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
5850 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
5851 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
5852 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
5853
5854 *** Supported image types
5855
5856 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
5857
5858 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
5859 properties supported are
5860
5861 `:foreground FG'
5862
5863 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
5864 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground.
5865
5866 `:background BG'
5867
5868 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
5869 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
5870
5871 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
5872 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
5873 instead of a `:file' property.
5874
5875 `:width WIDTH'
5876
5877 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
5878
5879 `:height HEIGHT'
5880
5881 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
5882
5883 `:data DATA'
5884
5885 DATA must be either
5886
5887 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
5888 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
5889
5890 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
5891
5892 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
5893 bitmap.
5894
5895 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
5896 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
5897 in the file.
5898
5899 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
5900
5901 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
5902 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
5903 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
5904 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
5905
5906 Additional image properties supported are:
5907
5908 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
5909
5910 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
5911 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
5912 name.
5913
5914 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
5915 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
5916
5917 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
5918 to display compressed images.
5919
5920 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
5921
5922 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
5923 mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
5924 mono images are
5925
5926 `:foreground FG'
5927
5928 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
5929 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground.
5930
5931 `:background FG'
5932
5933 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
5934 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
5935
5936 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
5937
5938 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
5939 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
5940 are:
5941
5942 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
5943
5944 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
5945 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
5946 properties defined.
5947
5948 **** GIF, image type `gif'
5949
5950 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
5951 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
5952
5953 Additional image properties supported are:
5954
5955 `:index INDEX'
5956
5957 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
5958 multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large.
5959
5960 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
5961 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
5962 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
5963 every 0.1 seconds.
5964
5965 (defun show-anim (file max)
5966 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
5967 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
5968
5969 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
5970 (when (= idx max)
5971 (setq idx 0))
5972 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
5973 (save-excursion
5974 (set-buffer buffer)
5975 (goto-char (point-min))
5976 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
5977 (insert-image img "x"))
5978 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
5979
5980 **** PNG, image type `png'
5981
5982 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
5983 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
5984 properties defined.
5985
5986 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
5987
5988 Additional image properties supported are:
5989
5990 `:pt-width WIDTH'
5991
5992 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
5993 integer. This is a required property.
5994
5995 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
5996
5997 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
5998 must be a integer. This is an required property.
5999
6000 `:bounding-box BOX'
6001
6002 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
6003 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
6004 files. This is an required property.
6005
6006 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
6007 lisp/gs.el.
6008
6009 *** Lisp interface.
6010
6011 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
6012 which are supported in the current configuration.
6013
6014 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
6015 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
6016 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
6017 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
6018 images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
6019
6020 *** Simplified image API, image.el
6021
6022 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
6023 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
6024 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
6025 define an image based on available image types. The functions
6026 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
6027 buffer.
6028
6029 ** Display margins.
6030
6031 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
6032 and images.
6033
6034 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
6035 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
6036 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
6037 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
6038 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
6039 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
6040 of the display margins.
6041
6042 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
6043 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
6044 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
6045 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
6046 in this file).
6047
6048 ** Help display
6049
6050 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
6051 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
6052 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
6053 that have a `help-echo' property.
6054
6055 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
6056 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
6057 the window in which the help was found.
6058
6059 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
6060 `help-echo' text property was found.
6061
6062 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
6063 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
6064
6065 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
6066 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
6067 mouse.
6068
6069 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
6070 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
6071
6072 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
6073 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
6074 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
6075 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
6076 used as help string.
6077
6078 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
6079 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
6080 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
6081
6082 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
6083
6084 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
6085 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
6086
6087 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
6088 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
6089 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
6090 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
6091 used.
6092
6093 (global-set-key [A-down]
6094 #'(lambda ()
6095 (interactive)
6096 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
6097 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
6098 (global-set-key [A-up]
6099 #'(lambda ()
6100 (interactive)
6101 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
6102 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
6103
6104 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
6105
6106 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
6107 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
6108 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
6109 is called with one argument, POS.
6110
6111 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
6112 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
6113 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
6114 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
6115 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
6116
6117 ** Tool bar support.
6118
6119 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
6120 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
6121 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
6122 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
6123 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
6124 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
6125
6126 *** Tool bar item definitions
6127
6128 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
6129 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
6130 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
6131
6132 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
6133 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
6134 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
6135 property (see below).
6136
6137 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
6138 binding are currently ignored.
6139
6140 The following properties are recognized:
6141
6142 `:enable FORM'.
6143
6144 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
6145 or disabled.
6146
6147 `:visible FORM'
6148
6149 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
6150
6151 `:filter FUNCTION'
6152
6153 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
6154 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
6155 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
6156
6157 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
6158
6159 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
6160 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
6161
6162 `:image IMAGES'
6163
6164 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
6165 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
6166 meaning of each of the four elements:
6167
6168 Index Use when item is
6169 ----------------------------------------
6170 0 enabled and selected
6171 1 enabled and deselected
6172 2 disabled and selected
6173 3 disabled and deselected
6174
6175 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
6176 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
6177
6178 `:help HELP-STRING'.
6179
6180 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
6181 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
6182
6183 The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
6184 toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
6185 to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
6186 menu bar.
6187
6188 The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
6189 dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
6190 buffer-locally to override the global map.
6191
6192 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
6193
6194 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
6195 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
6196 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
6197
6198 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
6199 raised when the mouse moves over them.
6200
6201 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
6202 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
6203 pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and
6204 vertical margins . Default is 1.
6205
6206 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
6207 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
6208
6209 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
6210
6211 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
6212 a tool bar item. If
6213
6214 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
6215 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
6216 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
6217
6218 is the original tool bar item definition, then
6219
6220 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
6221
6222 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
6223 item.
6224
6225 ** Mode line changes.
6226
6227 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
6228
6229 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
6230 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
6231 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
6232
6233 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
6234 a `local-map' text property.
6235
6236 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
6237 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
6238
6239 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
6240 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
6241 `local-map' property.
6242
6243 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
6244 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
6245 example.
6246
6247 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
6248 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
6249
6250 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
6251 variable mode-line-format to nil.
6252
6253 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
6254
6255 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
6256 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
6257 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
6258 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
6259 line.
6260
6261 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
6262 `header-line'.
6263
6264 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
6265 position in the header-line.
6266
6267 ** Text property `display'
6268
6269 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
6270 replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
6271 also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
6272 the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
6273 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
6274
6275 *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
6276
6277 To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
6278 text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
6279
6280 If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
6281 marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
6282 the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
6283 is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
6284 simpler form STRING as property value.
6285
6286 *** Variable width and height spaces
6287
6288 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
6289 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
6290 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
6291 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
6292 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
6293 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
6294 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
6295
6296 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
6297 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
6298 properties described below.
6299
6300 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
6301 characters having the `display' property.
6302
6303 - :width WIDTH
6304
6305 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
6306 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
6307
6308 - :relative-width FACTOR
6309
6310 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
6311 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
6312 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
6313 width of that character by FACTOR.
6314
6315 - :align-to HPOS
6316
6317 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
6318 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
6319
6320 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
6321
6322 - :height HEIGHT
6323
6324 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
6325 normal line height.
6326
6327 - :relative-height FACTOR
6328
6329 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
6330 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
6331
6332 - :ascent ASCENT
6333
6334 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
6335 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
6336 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
6337 equal to 100.
6338
6339 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
6340
6341 *** Images
6342
6343 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
6344 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
6345 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
6346 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
6347 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
6348 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
6349 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
6350 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
6351 as display specification.
6352
6353 *** Other display properties
6354
6355 - (space-width FACTOR)
6356
6357 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
6358 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
6359 integer or float.
6360
6361 - (height HEIGHT)
6362
6363 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
6364
6365 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
6366 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
6367 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
6368 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
6369 a font is available counts as a step.
6370
6371 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
6372 as tall as the frame's default font.
6373
6374 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
6375 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
6376
6377 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
6378 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
6379
6380 - (raise FACTOR)
6381
6382 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
6383 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
6384 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
6385 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
6386 `height' subproperty.
6387
6388 *** Conditional display properties
6389
6390 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
6391 has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies
6392 only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the
6393 evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the
6394 conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are
6395 bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where
6396 the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be
6397 different when object is a string.
6398
6399 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
6400 `(when t . SPEC)'.
6401
6402 ** New menu separator types.
6403
6404 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
6405 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
6406 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
6407 to specify other menu separator types.
6408
6409 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
6410
6411 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
6412 separator occurs.
6413
6414 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
6415
6416 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
6417
6418 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
6419
6420 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
6421
6422 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
6423
6424 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
6425
6426 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
6427
6428 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
6429
6430 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
6431
6432 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form
6433 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
6434
6435 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
6436
6437 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
6438
6439 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
6440
6441 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
6442
6443 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
6444
6445 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
6446
6447 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
6448
6449 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
6450
6451 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
6452
6453 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
6454
6455 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
6456
6457 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
6458
6459 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
6460
6461 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
6462
6463 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
6464 the corresponding single-line separators.
6465
6466 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
6467
6468 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
6469 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
6470 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
6471 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
6472 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
6473 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
6474 default foreground is black.
6475
6476 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
6477 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
6478 `ScrollBarBackground').
6479
6480 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
6481 settings for scroll bar colors.
6482
6483 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
6484 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
6485
6486 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
6487 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
6488 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
6489 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
6490 the original window start.
6491
6492 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
6493 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
6494 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
6495
6496 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
6497
6498 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
6499 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
6500 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
6501 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
6502
6503 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
6504 fixed-width and fixed-height.
6505
6506 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
6507
6508 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
6509 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
6510 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
6511 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
6512 temporarily to nil, for example
6513
6514 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
6515 (enlarge-window 10))
6516
6517 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
6518 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
6519
6520 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
6521 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
6522 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
6523 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
6524 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
6525 support a vertical-bar cursor).
6526
6527
6528
6529 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
6530
6531 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
6532 input.
6533
6534 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
6535
6536 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
6537
6538 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
6539 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
6540 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
6541 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
6542 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
6543
6544 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
6545 been added.
6546
6547
6548 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
6549
6550 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
6551
6552
6553
6554 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
6555
6556 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
6557 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
6558
6559 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
6560
6561 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
6562
6563 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
6564 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
6565 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
6566
6567 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
6568 is the one that is used.
6569
6570 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
6571 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
6572 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
6573 separate from the command's regular output.
6574 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
6575 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
6576 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
6577 the buffer name.
6578
6579 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
6580 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
6581 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
6582 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
6583
6584 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
6585 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
6586 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
6587 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
6588
6589 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
6590 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
6591 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
6592 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
6593
6594 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
6595 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
6596 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
6597 they never ignore case.
6598
6599 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
6600 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
6601 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
6602 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
6603 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
6604 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
6605 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
6606
6607 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
6608 the same format that was used in the file before.
6609
6610 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
6611 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
6612
6613 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
6614 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
6615 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
6616
6617 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
6618 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
6619 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
6620 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
6621 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
6622 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
6623 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
6624
6625 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
6626 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
6627 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
6628 format. You can now customize these variables.
6629
6630 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
6631 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
6632 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
6633 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
6634
6635 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
6636 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
6637 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
6638
6639 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
6640 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
6641 doesn't have any effect.
6642
6643 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
6644 not one per buffer.
6645
6646 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
6647 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
6648 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
6649
6650 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
6651 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
6652 `auto-show-mode' command.
6653
6654 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
6655 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
6656 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
6657 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
6658 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
6659
6660 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
6661 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
6662
6663 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
6664 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
6665 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
6666
6667 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
6668 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
6669 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
6670 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
6671
6672 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
6673
6674 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
6675 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
6676 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
6677 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
6678 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
6679
6680 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
6681 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
6682
6683 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
6684 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
6685 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
6686 `?' on other systems.
6687
6688 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
6689 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
6690 Unix.
6691
6692 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
6693 current codepage when it starts.
6694
6695 ** Mail changes
6696
6697 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
6698 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
6699 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
6700 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
6701 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
6702 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
6703 latin-1:
6704
6705 MIME-version: 1.0
6706 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
6707 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
6708
6709 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
6710 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
6711 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
6712 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
6713 buffer-file-coding-system.
6714
6715 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
6716 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
6717 mail.
6718
6719 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
6720 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
6721 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
6722 list of possible coding systems.
6723
6724 ** CC Mode changes
6725
6726 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
6727 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
6728 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
6729 docstring for details.
6730
6731 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
6732 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
6733 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
6734 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
6735 lineup functions use this feature currently.
6736
6737 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
6738 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
6739
6740 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
6741 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
6742
6743 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
6744 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
6745 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
6746 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
6747 anonymous classes.
6748
6749 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
6750 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
6751
6752 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
6753 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
6754 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
6755 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
6756
6757 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
6758 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
6759 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
6760 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
6761 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
6762
6763 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
6764
6765 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
6766
6767 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
6768 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
6769
6770 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
6771
6772 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
6773 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
6774 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
6775 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
6776 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
6777
6778 ** Gnus changes.
6779
6780 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
6781 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
6782 Gnus manual for the full story.
6783
6784 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
6785 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
6786 group, which is created automatically.
6787
6788 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
6789 values.
6790
6791 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
6792
6793 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
6794 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
6795
6796 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
6797 `C-u C-c C-c'.
6798
6799 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
6800
6801 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
6802 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
6803
6804 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
6805
6806 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
6807 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
6808
6809 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
6810 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
6811
6812 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
6813 control over simplification.
6814
6815 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
6816
6817 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
6818 limit.
6819
6820 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
6821
6822 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
6823
6824 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
6825 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
6826 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
6827
6828 *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
6829 `a' forces normal posting method.
6830
6831 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
6832 -- `W d'.
6833
6834 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
6835 to a non-nil value.
6836
6837 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
6838 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
6839
6840 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
6841 has been added.
6842
6843 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
6844
6845 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
6846
6847 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
6848 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
6849
6850 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
6851 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
6852
6853 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
6854
6855 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
6856 been added.
6857
6858 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
6859 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
6860
6861 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
6862 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
6863
6864 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
6865
6866 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
6867
6868 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
6869
6870 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
6871
6872 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
6873 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
6874 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
6875
6876 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
6877 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
6878 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
6879 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
6880 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
6881
6882 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
6883 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
6884 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
6885 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
6886
6887 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
6888 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
6889 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
6890 mismatch.
6891
6892 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
6893
6894 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
6895 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
6896
6897 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
6898 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
6899 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
6900 removed from the label.
6901
6902 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
6903 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
6904
6905 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
6906 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
6907
6908 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
6909 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
6910 expressions.
6911
6912 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
6913
6914 ** New/deleted modes and packages
6915
6916 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
6917 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
6918
6919 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
6920 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
6921 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
6922
6923 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
6924 changes with a special face.
6925
6926 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
6927 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
6928 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
6929
6930 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
6931
6932 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
6933 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
6934 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
6935 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
6936 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
6937
6938 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
6939 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
6940 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
6941
6942 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
6943 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
6944 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
6945 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
6946 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
6947 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
6948 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
6949 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
6950 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
6951
6952 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
6953 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
6954 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
6955 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
6956 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
6957 program.
6958
6959 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
6960 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
6961 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
6962 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
6963 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
6964 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
6965
6966 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
6967 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
6968 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
6969 was not documented clearly before.
6970
6971 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
6972 This includes Tetris and Snake.
6973
6974 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
6975
6976 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
6977 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
6978 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
6979 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
6980
6981 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
6982 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
6983 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
6984
6985 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
6986
6987 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
6988 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
6989
6990 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
6991 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
6992 integers.
6993
6994 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
6995 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
6996 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
6997 file names and attributes are returned.
6998
6999 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
7000 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
7001 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes.
7002 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
7003 returns the result.
7004
7005 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
7006 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
7007
7008 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
7009
7010 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
7011 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
7012 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
7013 optionally.
7014
7015 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
7016 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
7017
7018 **
7019 The new function process-running-child-p
7020 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
7021 terminal to its own child process.
7022
7023 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
7024 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
7025 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
7026 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
7027
7028 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
7029 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
7030
7031 ** easymenu.el now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
7032 :included is an alias for :visible.
7033
7034 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
7035 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
7036 to move or copy menu entries.
7037
7038 ** Multibyte editing changes
7039
7040 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
7041 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
7042 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
7043 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
7044 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
7045 (setq char (sref str idx)
7046 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
7047 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
7048
7049 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
7050 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
7051 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
7052
7053 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
7054 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
7055 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
7056
7057 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited
7058
7059 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
7060 across the boundary.
7061
7062 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
7063 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
7064 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
7065 contains 8-bit characters.
7066 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
7067 contains invalid characters.
7068
7069 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
7070 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
7071 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
7072 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
7073 way.
7074
7075 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
7076 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
7077 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
7078 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
7079
7080 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
7081 compose Thai characters in a string.
7082
7083 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
7084 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
7085 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
7086 menus should always use the third argument.
7087
7088 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
7089 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
7090 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
7091 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
7092
7093 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
7094 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
7095 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
7096 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
7097
7098 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
7099 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
7100 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
7101 echo area contents.
7102
7103 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
7104
7105 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
7106 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
7107 requested feature cannot be loaded.
7108
7109 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
7110 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
7111 means to clear out that attribute.
7112
7113 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
7114 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
7115
7116 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
7117 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
7118 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
7119 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
7120
7121 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
7122 the gap of the current buffer.
7123
7124 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
7125 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
7126 current buffer.
7127
7128 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
7129 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
7130 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
7131 it back in after any modifications have been made.
7132
7133 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
7134
7135 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
7136 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
7137 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
7138 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
7139 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
7140
7141 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
7142 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
7143 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
7144 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
7145 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
7146
7147 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
7148 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
7149 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
7150
7151 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
7152 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
7153 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
7154 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
7155 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
7156 results.
7157
7158 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
7159 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
7160 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
7161 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
7162
7163 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
7164
7165 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
7166 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
7167 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
7168 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
7169
7170 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
7171 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
7172 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
7173 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
7174 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
7175 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
7176 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
7177 region.
7178
7179 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
7180 selective undo.
7181
7182 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
7183 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
7184 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
7185 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
7186 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
7187
7188 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
7189 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
7190 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
7191 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
7192
7193 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
7194 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
7195 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
7196 something that most users not do.
7197
7198 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
7199 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
7200 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
7201 applications.
7202
7203 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
7204 pasting operations.
7205
7206 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
7207 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
7208 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
7209 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
7210 `ps-printer-name'.
7211
7212 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
7213 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
7214 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
7215 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
7216 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
7217 hits a new word.
7218
7219 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
7220 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
7221 to be confused by TeX commands.
7222
7223 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
7224 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
7225 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
7226 of various alternative replacements and actions.
7227
7228 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
7229 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
7230 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
7231 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
7232 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
7233
7234 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
7235 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
7236
7237 ** Changes in input method usage.
7238
7239 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
7240 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
7241 respectively.
7242
7243 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
7244
7245 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
7246 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
7247
7248 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
7249 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
7250
7251 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
7252
7253 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
7254
7255 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
7256 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
7257
7258 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
7259 given in the following case:
7260 o When you are using a complex input method.
7261 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
7262
7263 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
7264 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
7265 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
7266 setting it to t is helpful.
7267
7268 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
7269
7270 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
7271 keys:
7272 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
7273 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
7274 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
7275 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
7276 environment.
7277
7278 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
7279 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
7280 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
7281 get
7282
7283 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
7284
7285 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
7286
7287 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
7288 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
7289
7290 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
7291 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
7292 its owner and group.
7293
7294 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
7295 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
7296
7297 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
7298 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
7299
7300 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
7301 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
7302 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
7303 by the left edge of the rectangle.
7304
7305 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
7306 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
7307 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
7308 for writing keyboard macros.
7309
7310 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
7311 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
7312 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
7313 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
7314 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
7315 info.
7316
7317 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
7318
7319 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
7320 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
7321 contents only.
7322
7323 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
7324 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
7325 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
7326 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
7327
7328 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
7329 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
7330 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
7331
7332 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
7333 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
7334 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
7335 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
7336
7337 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
7338 failure if the command produces no output.
7339
7340 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
7341 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
7342 the mouse.
7343
7344 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
7345 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
7346 function and variable names.
7347
7348 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
7349 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
7350 file-coding-system-alist.
7351
7352 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
7353 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
7354 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
7355 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
7356 according to the current fontset.
7357
7358 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
7359
7360 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
7361 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
7362 nonascii-insert-offset.
7363
7364 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
7365 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
7366 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
7367 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
7368
7369 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
7370 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
7371
7372 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
7373 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
7374
7375 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
7376 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
7377 command keys.
7378
7379 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
7380 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
7381
7382 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
7383 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
7384 all variables that have documentation.
7385
7386 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
7387 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
7388 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
7389 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
7390 it should show; the default is 20.
7391
7392 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
7393 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
7394 of your input.
7395
7396 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
7397 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
7398 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
7399 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
7400 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
7401 Newly added options are included as well.
7402
7403 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
7404 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
7405 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
7406
7407 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
7408 Customize menu.
7409
7410 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
7411 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
7412
7413 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
7414 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
7415 invoked.
7416
7417 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
7418 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
7419 The default is 1.
7420
7421 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
7422 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
7423 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
7424 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
7425 sensibly.
7426
7427 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
7428
7429 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
7430 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
7431 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
7432
7433 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
7434 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
7435 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
7436 every night.
7437
7438 ** Desktop changes
7439
7440 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
7441 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
7442
7443 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
7444 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
7445
7446 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
7447 read and post multi-lingual articles.
7448
7449 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
7450 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
7451 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
7452 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
7453 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
7454 made invisible again.
7455
7456 ** Mail reading and sending changes
7457
7458 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
7459 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
7460 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
7461 toggle.
7462
7463 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
7464 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
7465 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
7466 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
7467 rmail-default-body-file.
7468
7469 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
7470 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
7471 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
7472
7473 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
7474 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
7475 is evaluated to insert the signature.
7476
7477 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
7478 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
7479 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
7480 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
7481 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
7482 especially interested in trying feedmail.
7483
7484 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
7485 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
7486 provided by feedmail are:
7487
7488 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
7489 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
7490 there is also a queue for draft messages
7491
7492 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
7493 be prompted for confirmation
7494
7495 **** does smart filling of address headers
7496
7497 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
7498 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
7499 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
7500
7501 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
7502 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
7503 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
7504 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
7505
7506 ** Dired changes
7507
7508 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
7509 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
7510
7511 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
7512 run Dired on the directory name at point.
7513
7514 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
7515 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
7516 for a specified regexp.
7517
7518 ** VC Changes
7519
7520 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
7521 conveniently.
7522
7523 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
7524 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
7525 Dired.
7526
7527 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
7528 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
7529 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
7530 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
7531
7532 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
7533 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
7534 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
7535 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
7536 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
7537
7538 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
7539 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
7540 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
7541 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
7542 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
7543
7544 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
7545 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
7546 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
7547 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
7548
7549 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
7550 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
7551 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
7552
7553 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
7554 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
7555 session to resolve them.
7556
7557 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
7558 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
7559 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
7560 uses as well).
7561
7562 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
7563 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
7564 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
7565 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
7566 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
7567 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
7568 using ediff.
7569
7570 ** Changes in Font Lock
7571
7572 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
7573 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
7574 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
7575 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
7576 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
7577
7578 ** Frame name display changes
7579
7580 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
7581 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
7582 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
7583 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
7584
7585 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
7586 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
7587 menu.
7588
7589 ** Comint (subshell) changes
7590
7591 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
7592 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
7593 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
7594
7595 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
7596
7597 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
7598 that is, the line after the last line you got.
7599 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
7600
7601 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
7602 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
7603 the following line.
7604
7605 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
7606 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
7607 previously sent input.
7608
7609 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
7610 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
7611 as the search string.
7612
7613 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
7614 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
7615
7616 ** C mode changes
7617
7618 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
7619 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
7620 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
7621 definition.
7622
7623 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
7624 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
7625 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
7626 style is still the default however.
7627
7628 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
7629
7630 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
7631 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
7632 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
7633
7634 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
7635 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
7636
7637 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
7638 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
7639
7640 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
7641 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
7642
7643 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
7644 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
7645
7646 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
7647 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
7648 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
7649 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
7650
7651 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
7652
7653 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
7654 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
7655 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
7656
7657 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
7658 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
7659 expanding dynamically.
7660
7661 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
7662 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
7663
7664 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
7665 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
7666 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
7667 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
7668
7669 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
7670
7671 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7672
7673 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
7674 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
7675 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
7676 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
7677 against the first word in the title.
7678
7679 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
7680 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
7681 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
7682 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
7683 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
7684 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
7685
7686 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
7687 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
7688 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
7689 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
7690
7691 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
7692
7693 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
7694 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
7695 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
7696 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
7697 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
7698 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
7699
7700 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
7701 Editing group once the package is loaded.
7702
7703 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
7704 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
7705 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior.
7706
7707 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
7708 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
7709
7710 ** Ispell changes.
7711
7712 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
7713 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
7714 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
7715
7716 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
7717 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
7718 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
7719 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
7720 include:
7721
7722 o URLs are automatically skipped
7723 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
7724
7725 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
7726
7727 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
7728
7729 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
7730 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
7731 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
7732 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
7733
7734 *** New recursive parser.
7735
7736 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
7737 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
7738 recursive parser scans the individual files.
7739
7740 *** Parsing only part of a document.
7741
7742 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
7743 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
7744 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
7745
7746 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
7747
7748 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
7749
7750 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
7751
7752 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
7753
7754 *** Using multiple selection buffers
7755
7756 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
7757 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
7758
7759 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
7760
7761 *** References to external documents.
7762
7763 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
7764 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
7765 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
7766 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
7767 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
7768 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
7769 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
7770
7771 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
7772
7773 The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
7774 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
7775
7776 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
7777 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
7778
7779 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
7780
7781 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
7782 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
7783
7784 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
7785
7786 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
7787 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
7788 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
7789 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
7790 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
7791 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
7792 more.
7793
7794 *** Support for the varioref package
7795
7796 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
7797
7798 *** New hooks
7799
7800 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
7801 and citations are created. These hooks are
7802 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
7803 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
7804
7805 *** Citations outside LaTeX
7806
7807 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
7808 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
7809
7810 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
7811
7812 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
7813 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
7814 fontified, use
7815
7816 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
7817
7818 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
7819 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
7820 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
7821 directories that contain the same file name.
7822
7823 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
7824 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
7825 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
7826 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
7827 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
7828 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
7829 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
7830 directory.
7831
7832 ** New modes and packages
7833
7834 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
7835 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
7836 it, but some do not.
7837
7838 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
7839 code.
7840
7841 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
7842 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
7843 around in a buffer.
7844
7845 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
7846
7847 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
7848 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
7849 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
7850 established system of notation similar to Chess.
7851
7852 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
7853 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
7854 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
7855
7856 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
7857 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
7858 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
7859 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
7860 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
7861 the like.
7862
7863 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
7864 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
7865
7866 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
7867 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
7868 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
7869 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
7870
7871 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
7872
7873 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
7874 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
7875 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
7876 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
7877 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
7878 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
7879 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
7880 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
7881 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
7882 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
7883 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
7884
7885 Platform-specific modes:
7886
7887 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
7888 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
7889 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
7890 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
7891 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
7892 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
7893 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
7894 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
7895 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
7896
7897 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
7898
7899 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
7900 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
7901 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
7902 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
7903
7904 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
7905 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
7906 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
7907
7908 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
7909 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
7910 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
7911 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
7912
7913 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
7914 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
7915 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
7916 environment.
7917
7918 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
7919 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
7920 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
7921 current input method for reading this one event.
7922
7923 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
7924 now control whether to output certain characters as
7925 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
7926 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
7927 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
7928 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
7929
7930 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
7931
7932 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
7933 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
7934
7935 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
7936 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
7937 always increases point by 1.
7938
7939 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
7940 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
7941
7942 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
7943
7944 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
7945 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
7946 default value changed. For example,
7947
7948 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
7949 :type 'integer
7950 :group 'foo
7951 :version "20.3")
7952
7953 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
7954 :version "20.3")
7955
7956 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
7957 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
7958 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
7959 `:version' in the top level group.
7960
7961 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
7962
7963 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
7964 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
7965
7966 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
7967 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
7968 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
7969 to themselves.
7970
7971 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
7972 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
7973 values whatever.
7974
7975 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
7976 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
7977 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
7978
7979 ** Frame-local variables.
7980
7981 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
7982 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
7983 local bindings for that variable.
7984
7985 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
7986 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
7987 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
7988 parameter name.
7989
7990 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
7991 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
7992 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
7993 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
7994
7995 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
7996 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
7997 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
7998 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
7999
8000 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
8001 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
8002 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
8003 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
8004 See the documentation in sregex.el.
8005
8006 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
8007 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
8008 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
8009 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
8010
8011 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
8012 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
8013
8014 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
8015 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
8016 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
8017
8018 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
8019 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
8020 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
8021 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
8022
8023 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
8024 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
8025 empty input.
8026
8027 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
8028 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
8029 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
8030 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
8031 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
8032
8033 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
8034 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
8035 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
8036 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
8037
8038 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
8039 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
8040 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
8041 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
8042 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
8043
8044 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
8045 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
8046 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
8047 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
8048
8049 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
8050 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
8051 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
8052
8053 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
8054 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
8055 was directed to display this buffer.
8056
8057 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
8058 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
8059 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
8060 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
8061 set-window-configuration.
8062
8063 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
8064 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
8065 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
8066 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
8067
8068 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
8069 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
8070 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
8071
8072 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
8073 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
8074 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
8075
8076 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
8077 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
8078
8079 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
8080 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
8081
8082 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
8083 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
8084 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
8085
8086 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
8087 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
8088 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
8089 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
8090
8091 ** Menu changes
8092
8093 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
8094 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
8095 better supported.
8096
8097 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
8098 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
8099 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
8100 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
8101 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
8102
8103 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
8104
8105 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
8106 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
8107 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
8108 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
8109
8110 The format is:
8111 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
8112 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
8113 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
8114 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
8115 The supported properties include
8116
8117 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
8118 item is enabled.
8119 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
8120 item should appear in the menu.
8121 :filter FILTER-FN
8122 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
8123 which will be REAL-BINDING.
8124 It should return a binding to use instead.
8125 :keys DESCRIPTION
8126 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
8127 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
8128 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
8129 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
8130 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
8131 keyboard binding.
8132 :key-sequence nil
8133 This means that the command normally has no
8134 keyboard equivalent.
8135 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
8136 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
8137 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
8138 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
8139 value says whether this button is currently selected.
8140
8141 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
8142 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
8143
8144 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
8145
8146 ** New event types
8147
8148 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
8149 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
8150 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
8151 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
8152
8153 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
8154
8155 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
8156 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
8157 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
8158 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
8159 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
8160 forward, away from the user.
8161
8162 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
8163
8164 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
8165 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
8166 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
8167 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
8168 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
8169
8170 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
8171
8172 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
8173 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
8174 that were dragged and dropped.
8175
8176 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
8177
8178 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
8179
8180 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
8181 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
8182 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
8183
8184 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
8185 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
8186 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
8187
8188 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
8189 in Emacs 19 and before.
8190
8191 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
8192 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
8193
8194 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
8195 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
8196 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
8197 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
8198
8199 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
8200 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
8201 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
8202 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
8203 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
8204
8205 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
8206 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
8207 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
8208 consistent with the new representation.
8209
8210 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
8211 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
8212 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
8213 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
8214
8215 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
8216 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
8217 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
8218
8219 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
8220 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
8221 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
8222
8223 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
8224 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
8225 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
8226
8227 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
8228 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
8229
8230 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
8231 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
8232
8233 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
8234 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
8235 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
8236 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
8237
8238 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
8239 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
8240
8241 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
8242 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
8243 buffer or string being searched.
8244
8245 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
8246 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
8247 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
8248 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
8249 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
8250 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
8251 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
8252
8253 *** Structure of coding system changed.
8254
8255 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
8256 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
8257 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
8258 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
8259 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
8260 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
8261 define-coding-system-alias.
8262
8263 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
8264 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
8265 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
8266 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
8267 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
8268 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
8269 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
8270 `iso-8859-1'.
8271
8272 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
8273 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
8274 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
8275 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
8276
8277 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
8278 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
8279 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
8280 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
8281
8282 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
8283 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
8284 This function requires a user interaction.
8285
8286 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
8287 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
8288 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
8289 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
8290 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
8291 select-safe-coding-system.
8292
8293 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
8294 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
8295 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
8296 was done.
8297
8298 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
8299 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
8300 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
8301
8302 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
8303 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
8304 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
8305 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
8306
8307 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
8308 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
8309 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
8310 converted.
8311
8312 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
8313 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
8314
8315 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
8316 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
8317 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
8318 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
8319 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
8320 range of characters.
8321
8322 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
8323 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
8324
8325 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
8326 in the current buffer at position POS.
8327
8328 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
8329 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
8330 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
8331 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
8332 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
8333 binding input-method-function to nil.
8334
8335 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
8336 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
8337 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
8338 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
8339 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
8340
8341 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
8342 subsequent events of a key sequence.
8343
8344 *** You can customize any language environment by using
8345 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
8346
8347 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
8348 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
8349 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
8350 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
8351 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
8352
8353 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
8354
8355 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
8356 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
8357 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
8358 tree structure.
8359
8360 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
8361 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
8362
8363 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
8364 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
8365 in your .emacs file.)
8366
8367 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
8368 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
8369
8370 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
8371 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
8372
8373 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
8374 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
8375 kills the region.
8376
8377 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
8378 delete the character before point, as usual.
8379
8380 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
8381 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
8382 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
8383
8384 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
8385 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
8386 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
8387 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
8388 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
8389 past.)
8390
8391 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
8392 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
8393 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
8394 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
8395 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
8396
8397 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
8398 and is an alias for it.
8399
8400 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
8401 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
8402
8403 ** Scrolling changes
8404
8405 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
8406 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
8407
8408 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
8409 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
8410 where it started.
8411
8412 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
8413 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
8414 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
8415 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
8416
8417 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
8418 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
8419 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
8420 recenters the window.
8421
8422 ** International character set support (MULE)
8423
8424 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
8425 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
8426 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
8427 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
8428 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
8429 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
8430
8431 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
8432 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
8433 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
8434 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
8435 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
8436
8437 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
8438 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
8439 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
8440 language, to make it possible to type them.
8441
8442 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
8443 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
8444
8445 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
8446 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
8447
8448 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
8449
8450 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
8451
8452 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
8453 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
8454 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
8455 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
8456 characters for their work until they want to change.
8457
8458 *** Input methods
8459
8460 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
8461 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
8462 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
8463 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
8464 support several input methods.
8465
8466 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
8467 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
8468 work.
8469
8470 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
8471 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
8472 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
8473 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
8474 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
8475 letter.
8476
8477 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
8478 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
8479 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
8480 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
8481 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
8482
8483 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
8484 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
8485 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
8486 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
8487
8488 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
8489 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
8490 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
8491 the first guess is wrong.
8492
8493 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
8494 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
8495
8496 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
8497 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
8498 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
8499 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
8500
8501 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
8502 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
8503 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
8504 translate automatically to and from either one.
8505
8506 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
8507
8508 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
8509 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
8510 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
8511 what you want.
8512
8513 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
8514 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
8515 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
8516 multibyte characters in that buffer.
8517
8518 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
8519 character conversion as well.
8520
8521 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
8522
8523 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
8524 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
8525 requires using many fonts.
8526
8527 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
8528 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
8529
8530 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
8531 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
8532 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
8533 you would use a font.
8534
8535 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
8536 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
8537 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
8538
8539 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
8540 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
8541 characters).
8542
8543 *** Defining fontsets.
8544
8545 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
8546 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
8547 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
8548
8549 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
8550 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
8551 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
8552 standard fontset are created automatically.
8553
8554 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
8555 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
8556 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
8557 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
8558 name is `fontset-startup'.
8559
8560 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
8561 The resource value should have this form:
8562 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
8563 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
8564 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
8565 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
8566 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
8567 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
8568 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
8569 CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME
8570 should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
8571
8572 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
8573 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
8574 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
8575
8576 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
8577 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
8578 following resource,
8579 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
8580 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
8581 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
8582 Here is the substitution rule:
8583 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
8584 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
8585 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
8586 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
8587 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
8588
8589 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
8590 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
8591 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
8592
8593 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
8594 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
8595 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
8596 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
8597 fontsets.
8598
8599 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
8600 defaults for a particular choice of language.
8601
8602 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
8603 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
8604 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
8605 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
8606 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
8607 system for new files that you create.
8608
8609 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
8610 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
8611 whole Emacs session.
8612
8613 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
8614 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
8615 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
8616
8617 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
8618 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
8619 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
8620 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
8621 coding systems that Emacs supports.
8622
8623 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
8624 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
8625 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
8626 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
8627 is used for *the immediately following command*.
8628
8629 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
8630 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
8631
8632 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
8633 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
8634
8635 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
8636 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
8637
8638 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
8639 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
8640 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
8641 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
8642 of the file.
8643
8644 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
8645 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
8646 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
8647 translated into that character code.
8648
8649 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
8650 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
8651
8652 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
8653
8654 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
8655 the coding system for keyboard input.
8656
8657 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
8658 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
8659 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
8660
8661 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
8662
8663 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
8664 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
8665 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
8666 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
8667 designed to work with terminals.
8668
8669 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
8670 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
8671 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
8672 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
8673 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
8674 in the corresponding buffer.
8675
8676 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
8677
8678 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
8679 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
8680 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
8681
8682 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
8683 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
8684 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
8685 want to use.
8686
8687 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
8688 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
8689
8690 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
8691 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
8692 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
8693 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
8694
8695 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
8696 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
8697 related information.
8698
8699 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
8700 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
8701 scripts.
8702
8703 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
8704 information about the support for a particular language.
8705 You specify the language as an argument.
8706
8707 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
8708 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
8709 first dash.
8710
8711 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
8712 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
8713 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
8714 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
8715
8716 A alternativnyj (Russian)
8717 B big5 (Chinese)
8718 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
8719 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
8720 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
8721 E euc-japan (Japanese)
8722 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
8723 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
8724 K euc-korea (Korean)
8725 R koi8 (Russian)
8726 Q tibetan
8727 S shift_jis (Japanese)
8728 T lao
8729 T tis620 (Thai)
8730 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
8731 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
8732 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
8733 v viqr (Vietnamese)
8734 z hz (Chinese)
8735
8736 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
8737 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
8738 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
8739 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
8740
8741 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
8742 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
8743
8744 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
8745 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
8746 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
8747 Rmail files themselves.
8748
8749 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
8750 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
8751
8752 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
8753 for sending mail:
8754
8755 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
8756 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
8757 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
8758 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
8759 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
8760
8761 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
8762 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
8763 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
8764 translations.
8765
8766 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
8767 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
8768 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
8769 without any conversion.
8770
8771 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
8772 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
8773 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
8774 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
8775
8776 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
8777 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
8778
8779 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
8780 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
8781
8782 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
8783 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
8784
8785 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
8786 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
8787 in the buffer before point.
8788
8789 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
8790 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
8791 you are using.
8792
8793 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
8794 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
8795
8796 ** File locking works with NFS now.
8797
8798 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
8799 in the same directory as FILENAME.
8800
8801 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
8802 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
8803 can become a bottleneck.
8804
8805 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
8806 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
8807 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
8808 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
8809 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
8810 so useful that the change is worth while.
8811
8812 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
8813 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
8814 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
8815 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
8816
8817 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
8818 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
8819 show-paren-mode.
8820
8821 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
8822 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
8823 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
8824
8825 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
8826 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
8827 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
8828
8829 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
8830 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
8831 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
8832
8833 ** Changes in View mode.
8834
8835 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
8836 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
8837
8838 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
8839 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
8840
8841 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
8842 previous state.
8843
8844 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
8845 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
8846
8847 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
8848 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
8849 not just the selected window.
8850
8851 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
8852 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
8853 turns View mode on or off.
8854
8855 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
8856 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
8857 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
8858
8859 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
8860 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
8861
8862 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
8863 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
8864 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
8865 which version to compare with.
8866
8867 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
8868 blocks if a match is inside the block.
8869
8870 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
8871 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
8872 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
8873 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
8874
8875 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
8876 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
8877 blocks, all of them or none.
8878
8879 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
8880 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
8881 confirmation first.
8882
8883 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
8884 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
8885 However, the mode will not be changed if
8886 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
8887 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
8888 not suitable for ordinary files, or
8889 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
8890
8891 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
8892
8893 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
8894 these commands do not change the major mode.
8895
8896 ** M-x occur changes.
8897
8898 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
8899 it performs a case-sensitive search.
8900
8901 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
8902 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
8903 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
8904
8905 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
8906 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
8907 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
8908 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
8909 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
8910
8911 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
8912 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
8913 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
8914 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
8915
8916 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8917 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
8918 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
8919
8920 ** Outline mode changes.
8921
8922 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
8923
8924 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
8925
8926 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
8927 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
8928 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
8929 was already active.
8930
8931 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
8932 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
8933 get confused by it.
8934
8935 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
8936 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
8937
8938 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
8939
8940 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8941 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
8942 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
8943 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
8944
8945 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
8946 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
8947 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
8948
8949 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
8950 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
8951 values.
8952
8953 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
8954 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
8955 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
8956 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
8957
8958 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
8959 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
8960 can be. The default value is 30.
8961
8962 ** Changes in Mail mode.
8963
8964 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
8965 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
8966 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
8967 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
8968 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
8969 behavior.
8970
8971 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
8972 compose-mail-other-frame.
8973
8974 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
8975 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
8976 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
8977 buffer that shows the original message.
8978
8979 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
8980 with separator lines around the contents.
8981
8982 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
8983 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
8984 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
8985 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
8986
8987 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
8988
8989 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
8990 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
8991 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
8992 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
8993
8994 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
8995 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
8996 /etc/passwd.
8997
8998 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
8999 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
9000 /etc/passwd.
9001
9002 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
9003 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
9004 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
9005 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
9006
9007 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
9008 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
9009 be taken to be magic.
9010
9011 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
9012 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
9013 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
9014
9015 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
9016 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
9017
9018 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
9019 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
9020
9021 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
9022
9023 new key dired.el binding old key
9024 ------- ---------------- -------
9025 * c dired-change-marks c
9026 * m dired-mark m
9027 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
9028 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
9029 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
9030 * u dired-unmark u
9031 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
9032 * ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-?
9033 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
9034 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
9035 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
9036 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
9037
9038 ** Rmail changes.
9039
9040 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
9041 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
9042 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
9043 each time you run it.
9044
9045 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
9046 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
9047
9048 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
9049 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
9050 means to move in the opposite direction.
9051
9052 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
9053 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
9054
9055 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
9056 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
9057 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
9058 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
9059 for output.
9060
9061 ** Gnus changes.
9062
9063 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
9064
9065 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
9066 Gnus.
9067
9068 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
9069 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
9070
9071 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
9072 article mode line.
9073
9074 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
9075
9076 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
9077
9078 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
9079
9080 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
9081 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
9082 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
9083
9084 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
9085
9086 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
9087
9088 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
9089 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
9090
9091 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
9092 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
9093 used to pick articles.
9094
9095 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
9096 another have been added.
9097
9098 `M-x gnus-change-server'
9099
9100 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
9101 generating lines in buffers.
9102
9103 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
9104 `C-M-_'.
9105
9106 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
9107
9108 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
9109
9110 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
9111
9112 *** Scores can be decayed.
9113
9114 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
9115
9116 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
9117 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
9118
9119 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
9120 the native server.
9121
9122 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
9123
9124 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
9125 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'.
9126
9127 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
9128
9129 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
9130 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
9131
9132 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
9133 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
9134
9135 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
9136 a group.
9137
9138 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
9139 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
9140
9141 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
9142
9143 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
9144
9145 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
9146
9147 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
9148
9149 Use the `Y c' command.
9150
9151 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
9152
9153 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
9154
9155 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
9156
9157 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
9158 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
9159
9160 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
9161
9162 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
9163
9164 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
9165 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
9166
9167 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
9168
9169 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
9170 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
9171 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
9172 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
9173 this issue.)
9174
9175 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
9176 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
9177 particular news group. This can be done by:
9178
9179 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
9180
9181 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
9182 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
9183 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
9184 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
9185 for reading and posting).
9186
9187 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
9188 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
9189 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
9190 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
9191 there.
9192
9193 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
9194 default. Here are some of these default settings:
9195
9196 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
9197 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
9198 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
9199 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
9200 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
9201
9202 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
9203 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
9204
9205 ** CC mode changes.
9206
9207 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
9208 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
9209 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
9210 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
9211 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
9212 loaded.
9213
9214 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
9215 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
9216 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
9217 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
9218 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
9219 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
9220
9221 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
9222 of the current buffer.
9223
9224 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
9225 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
9226 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
9227
9228 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
9229 style that the Python developers like.
9230
9231 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
9232 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
9233 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
9234
9235 ** VC Changes [new]
9236
9237 *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
9238 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
9239 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
9240
9241 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
9242 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
9243 developers.
9244
9245 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
9246 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
9247
9248 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
9249 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
9250 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
9251 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
9252
9253 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
9254 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
9255
9256 ** Calendar changes.
9257
9258 *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or
9259 subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow
9260 you do this for the year of the selected date, or the
9261 following/previous years.
9262
9263 *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in
9264 the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i
9265 calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days
9266 each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The
9267 calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a
9268 supposed attribute of God.
9269
9270 ** ps-print changes
9271
9272 There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page
9273 layout.
9274
9275 *** Headers & Footers (subgroup)
9276
9277 Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to
9278 be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your
9279 printer system has this behavior, set variable
9280 `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t.
9281
9282 If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a
9283 blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the
9284 very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014).
9285
9286 The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for
9287 setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are:
9288
9289 lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'.
9290 Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex
9291 printing for your printer.
9292
9293 setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the
9294 setpagedevice PostScript operator.
9295
9296 nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using
9297 the setpagedevice PostScript operator.
9298
9299 The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on
9300 opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If
9301 `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for
9302 bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil,
9303 ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom.
9304 This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil.
9305 The default value is nil.
9306
9307 The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame
9308 properties alist. Valid frame properties are:
9309
9310 fore-color Specify the foreground frame color.
9311 Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black
9312 color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a
9313 color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which
9314 correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each
9315 float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright
9316 color). The default is 0 ("black").
9317
9318 back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color).
9319 The default is 0.9 ("gray90").
9320
9321 shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color).
9322 The default is 0 ("black").
9323
9324 border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color).
9325 The default is 0 ("black").
9326
9327 border-width Specify the border width.
9328 The default is 0.4.
9329
9330 Any other property is ignored.
9331
9332 Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the
9333 `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for
9334 documentation).
9335
9336 Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are:
9337 `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame',
9338 `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad',
9339 `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and
9340 `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those
9341 controlling headers.
9342
9343 *** Color management (subgroup)
9344
9345 If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in
9346 color.
9347
9348 *** Face Management (subgroup)
9349
9350 If you need to print without worrying about face background colors,
9351 set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face
9352 background should be used. Valid values are:
9353
9354 t always use face background color.
9355 nil never use face background color.
9356 (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used.
9357
9358 *** N-up printing (subgroup)
9359
9360 The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per
9361 sheet of paper.
9362
9363 The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt)
9364 between the sheet border and the n-up printing.
9365
9366 If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around
9367 each page.
9368
9369 The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled
9370 on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for
9371 `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix:
9372
9373 `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12
9374 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
9375 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
9376
9377 `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9
9378 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
9379 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1
9380
9381 `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12
9382 2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11
9383 3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10
9384
9385 `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3
9386 11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2
9387 12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1
9388
9389 Any other value is treated as `left-top'.
9390
9391 *** Zebra stripes (subgroup)
9392
9393 The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or
9394 RGB color.
9395
9396 The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes
9397 continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+'
9398 to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed):
9399
9400 `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow'
9401 Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
9402 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
9403 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
9404 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
9405 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 +
9406 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 +
9407 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 +
9408 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
9409 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
9410 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
9411 10 + 10 +
9412 11 + 11 +
9413 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
9414 Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
9415 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 +
9416 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 +
9417 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 +
9418 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
9419 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
9420 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
9421 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 +
9422 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 +
9423 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 +
9424 21 + 21 XXXXXXXX +
9425 22 + 22 +
9426 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
9427
9428 Any other value is treated as `nil'.
9429
9430
9431 *** Printer management (subgroup)
9432
9433 The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by
9434 some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when
9435 `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr
9436 utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set
9437 to "-P".
9438
9439 The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual
9440 paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's
9441 non-nil, manual feeding takes place.
9442
9443 The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04)
9444 should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means
9445 do so.
9446
9447 *** Page settings (subgroup)
9448
9449 If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an
9450 error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size
9451 indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used
9452 instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if
9453 the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated
9454 by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to
9455 `setpagedevice'.
9456
9457 The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for
9458 printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means
9459 `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees).
9460
9461 The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If
9462 it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be
9463 integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO)
9464 specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that
9465 is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than
9466 its TO, are ignored.
9467
9468 The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd
9469 pages. Valid values are:
9470
9471 nil print all pages.
9472
9473 `even-page' print only even pages.
9474
9475 `odd-page' print only odd pages.
9476
9477 `even-sheet' print only even sheets.
9478 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
9479 `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll
9480 print only the even sheet of paper.
9481
9482 `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets.
9483 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
9484 `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print
9485 only the odd sheet of paper.
9486
9487 Any other value is treated as nil.
9488
9489 If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages
9490 are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by
9491 `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have:
9492
9493 (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20))
9494
9495 and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and
9496 `ps-n-up-printing', we get:
9497
9498 `ps-n-up-printing' = 1:
9499 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
9500 nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20
9501 even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
9502 odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
9503 even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
9504 odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
9505
9506 `ps-n-up-printing' = 2:
9507 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
9508 nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20
9509 even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20
9510 odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15
9511 even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16
9512 odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20
9513
9514 *** Miscellany (subgroup)
9515
9516 The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler
9517 messages should be sent.
9518
9519 It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in
9520 front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable
9521 `ps-user-defined-prologue'.
9522
9523 The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers.
9524
9525 The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in
9526 points for line numbers.
9527
9528 The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line
9529 numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation.
9530
9531 The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which
9532 line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set
9533 to 2, the printing will look like:
9534
9535 1 one line
9536 one line
9537 3 one line
9538 one line
9539 5 one line
9540 one line
9541 ...
9542
9543 Valid values are:
9544
9545 integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are
9546 printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1
9547 is used.
9548
9549 `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a
9550 zebra stripe is to be printed.
9551
9552 Any other value is treated as `zebra'.
9553
9554 The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in
9555 the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if
9556 `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to
9557 3, the output will look like:
9558
9559 one line
9560 one line
9561 3 one line
9562 one line
9563 one line
9564 6 one line
9565 one line
9566 one line
9567 9 one line
9568 one line
9569 ...
9570
9571 The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory
9572 where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found.
9573
9574 The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points,
9575 for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
9576 `ps-font-size').
9577
9578 The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing,
9579 in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
9580 `ps-font-size').
9581
9582 The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter.
9583
9584 The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the
9585 start and end of a region to cut out when printing.
9586
9587 ** hideshow changes.
9588
9589 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
9590 C++, ; for lisp).
9591
9592 *** Support for java-mode added.
9593
9594 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
9595 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
9596
9597 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at
9598 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
9599 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
9600
9601 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
9602 robust and a lot faster.
9603
9604 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
9605
9606 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
9607 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
9608 documentation for more details.
9609
9610 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
9611
9612 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
9613 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
9614 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
9615 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
9616 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
9617
9618 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
9619 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
9620 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
9621 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
9622
9623 ** Font Lock mode
9624
9625 *** Custom support
9626
9627 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
9628 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
9629 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
9630 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
9631 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
9632 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
9633
9634 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
9635
9636 *** Maximum decoration
9637
9638 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
9639 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
9640 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
9641 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
9642 to get the old behavior.
9643
9644 *** New support
9645
9646 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
9647
9648 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
9649 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
9650
9651 *** Configurable support
9652
9653 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
9654 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
9655 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
9656 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
9657 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
9658 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
9659 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
9660
9661 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
9662 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
9663 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
9664
9665 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
9666
9667 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
9668 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
9669 for any mode.
9670
9671 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
9672
9673 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
9674
9675 in your ~/.emacs.
9676
9677 *** New faces
9678
9679 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
9680 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
9681 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
9682 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
9683
9684 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
9685
9686 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
9687 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
9688 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
9689
9690 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
9691
9692 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
9693 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
9694 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
9695 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
9696 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
9697 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
9698 Lock mode behavior and the behavior of Font Lock mode.
9699
9700 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
9701 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
9702 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
9703 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
9704 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
9705 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
9706
9707 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
9708
9709 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
9710 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
9711 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
9712 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
9713
9714 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
9715 settings.
9716
9717 ** Ada mode changes.
9718
9719 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
9720 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
9721 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
9722 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
9723 stubs.
9724
9725 *** There are two new commands:
9726 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
9727 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
9728
9729 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
9730 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
9731 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
9732
9733 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
9734 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
9735 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
9736
9737 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
9738 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
9739 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
9740 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
9741
9742 ** Scheme mode changes.
9743
9744 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
9745 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
9746 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
9747 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
9748 have any effect.
9749
9750 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
9751 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
9752 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
9753 variables as buffer-local variables.
9754
9755 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
9756 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
9757
9758 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
9759
9760 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
9761 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
9762 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
9763 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
9764
9765 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
9766 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
9767 buffer in Emacs.
9768
9769 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
9770 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
9771 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
9772 option takes precedence.
9773
9774 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
9775 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
9776 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
9777
9778 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
9779 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
9780 the current defun.
9781
9782 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
9783 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
9784
9785 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
9786 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
9787 necessary).
9788
9789 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
9790 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
9791 these register values no longer become completely useless.
9792 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
9793 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
9794 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
9795
9796 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
9797 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
9798 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
9799 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
9800
9801 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
9802 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
9803 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
9804 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
9805 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
9806
9807 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
9808 since it applies only to the current frame.
9809
9810 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
9811 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
9812 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
9813
9814 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
9815 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
9816 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
9817 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
9818 instead of just the file you are editing.
9819
9820 ** RefTeX mode
9821
9822 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
9823 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
9824 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
9825 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
9826 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
9827
9828 C-c ( reftex-label
9829 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
9830 knows which kind of label is needed.
9831
9832 C-c ) reftex-reference
9833 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
9834 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
9835
9836 C-c [ reftex-citation
9837 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
9838 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
9839
9840 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
9841 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
9842
9843 C-c = reftex-toc
9844 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
9845 can quickly jump to every section.
9846
9847 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
9848 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
9849 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
9850 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
9851 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
9852
9853 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
9854
9855 *** Info documentation is now available.
9856
9857 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
9858 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
9859
9860 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
9861 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
9862
9863 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
9864 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
9865
9866 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
9867 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
9868 appropriate functions.
9869
9870 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
9871 entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h.
9872
9873 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
9874 been cleaned.
9875
9876 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
9877 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
9878
9879 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
9880 shall be delimited.
9881
9882 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
9883 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
9884 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
9885
9886 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
9887 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
9888 prefixed with `ALT'.
9889
9890 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
9891 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
9892 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
9893 documentation).
9894
9895 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
9896 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
9897 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
9898
9899 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
9900 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
9901
9902 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
9903 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
9904 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
9905
9906 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
9907
9908 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
9909
9910 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
9911 from alien sources.
9912
9913 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
9914 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
9915 crossref entries.
9916
9917 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
9918 region.
9919
9920 *** Added support for imenu.
9921
9922 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
9923 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
9924 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
9925 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
9926
9927 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
9928 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
9929
9930 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
9931
9932 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
9933
9934 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
9935 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
9936 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
9937 as an argument.
9938
9939 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
9940 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
9941
9942 ** browse-url changes
9943
9944 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
9945 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
9946 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
9947 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
9948 customization variables.
9949
9950 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
9951
9952 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
9953 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
9954 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
9955
9956 ** Changes in Ediff
9957
9958 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
9959 pops up the Info file for this command.
9960
9961 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
9962 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
9963 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
9964 directories).
9965
9966 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
9967 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
9968 files in the same directory.
9969
9970 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
9971 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
9972 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
9973
9974 ** Changes in Viper
9975
9976 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
9977 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
9978 instead of vip-.
9979 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
9980 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
9981 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
9982 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
9983 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
9984 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
9985 color when Viper is in insert state.
9986 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
9987 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
9988 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
9989
9990 ** Etags changes.
9991
9992 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
9993 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
9994 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
9995 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
9996 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
9997
9998 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
9999
10000 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
10001 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
10002
10003 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
10004 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
10005 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
10006
10007 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
10008 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
10009 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
10010 methods and protocols.
10011
10012 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
10013 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
10014 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
10015 paragraph name.
10016
10017 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
10018 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
10019 at least M times and as many as N times.
10020
10021 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
10022 in files has changed slightly.
10023
10024 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
10025 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
10026 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
10027 with old time-stamp-format values.
10028
10029 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
10030 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
10031 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
10032 reasons.
10033
10034 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
10035 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
10036 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
10037 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
10038 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
10039 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
10040
10041 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
10042 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
10043 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
10044
10045 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
10046 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
10047 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
10048 recommended now will continue to work then.
10049
10050 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
10051 details.
10052
10053 ** There are some additional major modes:
10054
10055 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
10056 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
10057 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
10058
10059 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
10060 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
10061 into Emacs.
10062
10063 ** New Lisp packages include:
10064
10065 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
10066
10067 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
10068 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
10069
10070 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
10071
10072 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
10073 in shell buffers.
10074
10075 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
10076 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
10077 and `elint-defun'.
10078
10079 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
10080 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
10081 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
10082 strings or comments.
10083
10084 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
10085 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
10086 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
10087 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
10088 at these points.
10089
10090 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
10091 can visit them by short forms of their names.
10092
10093 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
10094 Emacs Lisp function at point.
10095
10096 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
10097
10098 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
10099 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
10100
10101 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
10102
10103 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
10104
10105 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
10106
10107 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
10108 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
10109
10110 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
10111 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
10112 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
10113 original place after inserting the copy.
10114
10115 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
10116 on the buffer.
10117
10118 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
10119 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
10120 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
10121
10122 Enable mouse-drag with:
10123 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
10124 -or-
10125 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
10126
10127 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
10128 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
10129
10130 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
10131 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
10132
10133 *** ogonek
10134
10135 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
10136 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
10137 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
10138 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
10139 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
10140 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
10141 instance) and vice versa.
10142
10143 To use this package load it using
10144 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
10145 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
10146 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
10147 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
10148 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
10149 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
10150
10151 *** Interface to ph.
10152
10153 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
10154
10155 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
10156 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
10157 these servers.
10158
10159 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
10160
10161 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
10162 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
10163 while the real cursor does not move.
10164
10165 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
10166 for visiting your favorite web sites.
10167
10168 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
10169 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
10170
10171 ** movemail change
10172
10173 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
10174 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
10175 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
10176 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
10177
10178 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
10179
10180 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
10181
10182 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
10183
10184 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
10185 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
10186 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
10187 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
10188 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
10189
10190 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
10191 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
10192 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
10193 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
10194 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
10195 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
10196
10197 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
10198
10199 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
10200 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
10201 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
10202 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
10203
10204 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
10205 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
10206
10207 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
10208 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
10209 "win".
10210
10211 ** Basic Lisp changes
10212
10213 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
10214 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
10215
10216 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
10217 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
10218 or by the user.
10219
10220 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
10221
10222 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
10223
10224 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
10225 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
10226
10227 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
10228 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
10229 its argument.
10230
10231 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
10232
10233 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
10234
10235 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
10236
10237 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
10238 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
10239 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
10240 `format' function.
10241
10242 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
10243 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
10244 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
10245
10246 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
10247 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
10248 adding one of these suffixes.
10249
10250 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
10251 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
10252 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
10253
10254 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
10255 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
10256
10257 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
10258
10259 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
10260 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
10261
10262 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
10263 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
10264
10265 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
10266
10267 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
10268 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
10269
10270 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
10271 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
10272 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
10273 works using `save-current-buffer'.
10274
10275 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
10276 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
10277 of the last form.
10278
10279 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
10280 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
10281 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
10282 as the last form.
10283
10284 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
10285 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
10286 matches.
10287
10288 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
10289
10290 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
10291 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
10292 Then it returns that string.
10293
10294 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
10295
10296 (with-output-to-string
10297 (princ "The buffer is ")
10298 (princ (buffer-name)))
10299
10300 returns "The buffer is foo".
10301
10302 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
10303 is non-nil.
10304
10305 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
10306 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
10307 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
10308
10309 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
10310 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
10311
10312 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
10313 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
10314 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
10315 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
10316 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
10317 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
10318
10319 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
10320 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
10321 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
10322 characters".
10323
10324 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
10325 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
10326 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
10327 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
10328 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
10329
10330 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
10331 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
10332 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
10333 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
10334
10335 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
10336 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
10337
10338 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
10339
10340 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
10341 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
10342 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
10343 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
10344 guaranteed.
10345
10346 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
10347 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
10348 character).
10349
10350 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
10351
10352 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
10353 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
10354 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
10355 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
10356 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
10357
10358 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
10359
10360 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
10361 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
10362 more than the number of characters.
10363
10364 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
10365 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
10366 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
10367 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
10368 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
10369 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
10370
10371 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
10372 and returns a string containing those characters.
10373
10374 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
10375 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
10376 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
10377 character, sref signals an error.
10378
10379 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
10380 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
10381 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
10382
10383 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
10384 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
10385 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
10386
10387 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
10388 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
10389 to a vector of the characters in it.
10390
10391 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
10392 of a string. You call it as follows:
10393
10394 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
10395
10396 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
10397 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
10398 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
10399 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
10400 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
10401
10402 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
10403 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
10404
10405 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
10406 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
10407
10408 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
10409 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
10410 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
10411 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
10412
10413 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
10414
10415 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
10416
10417 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
10418 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
10419 are not included in the resulting value.
10420
10421 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
10422 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
10423 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
10424 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
10425
10426 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
10427 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
10428 character extends across that column), then the padding character
10429 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
10430 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
10431 column START-COLUMN.
10432
10433 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
10434 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
10435 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
10436 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
10437 changed text, before the change.
10438
10439 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
10440 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
10441 one character set for each script, not for each language.
10442
10443 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
10444
10445 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
10446
10447 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
10448 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
10449
10450 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
10451 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
10452 which identify the character within that character set.
10453
10454 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
10455 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
10456 opposite of split-char.
10457
10458 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
10459 of all the characters between BEG and END.
10460
10461 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
10462 of all the characters in a string.
10463
10464 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
10465 and specifying coding systems.
10466
10467 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
10468 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
10469 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
10470 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
10471 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
10472 as what to do about code conversion.)
10473
10474 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
10475 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
10476
10477 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
10478 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
10479 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
10480
10481 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
10482 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
10483 to match against a file name.
10484
10485 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
10486 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
10487 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
10488 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
10489 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
10490 specifies the coding system for encoding.
10491
10492 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
10493 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
10494
10495 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
10496 the coding system to use for network sockets.
10497
10498 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
10499 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
10500 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
10501 service names.
10502
10503 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
10504 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
10505 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
10506 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
10507 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
10508 specifies the coding system for encoding.
10509
10510 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
10511 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
10512
10513 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
10514 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
10515 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
10516 start the subprocess.
10517
10518 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
10519 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
10520 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
10521 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
10522 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
10523
10524 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
10525 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
10526 subprocess.
10527
10528 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
10529 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
10530 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
10531 connection permanently or until overridden.
10532
10533 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
10534 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
10535 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
10536 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
10537 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
10538 system for one operation at a time.
10539
10540 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
10541 files, subprocesses or network connections.
10542
10543 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
10544 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
10545 The value is a cons cell,
10546 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
10547 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
10548 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
10549 input to the subprocess.
10550
10551 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
10552 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
10553
10554 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
10555 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
10556 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
10557
10558 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
10559 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
10560 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
10561 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
10562 customization.
10563
10564 Thus, instead of writing
10565
10566 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
10567 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
10568
10569 you would now write this:
10570
10571 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
10572 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
10573 :type 'boolean
10574 :group foo)
10575
10576 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
10577 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
10578 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
10579 for a description of them.
10580
10581 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
10582 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
10583
10584 (defgroup ispell nil
10585 "Spell checking using Ispell."
10586 :group 'processes)
10587
10588 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
10589 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
10590 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
10591 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
10592 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
10593
10594 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
10595 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
10596 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
10597 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
10598 first-level subgroups.
10599
10600 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
10601
10602 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
10603 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
10604
10605 ** easy-mmode
10606
10607 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
10608 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
10609 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
10610 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
10611 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
10612 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
10613
10614 ** Text property changes
10615
10616 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
10617 text property.
10618
10619 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
10620 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
10621 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
10622 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
10623 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
10624
10625 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
10626 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
10627 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
10628 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
10629
10630 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
10631 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
10632 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
10633
10634 ** Changes in invisibility features
10635
10636 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
10637 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
10638 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
10639 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
10640 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
10641 make the overlay visible.
10642
10643 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
10644 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
10645 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
10646 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
10647 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
10648 t when it should hide it.
10649
10650 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
10651
10652 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
10653 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
10654 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
10655 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
10656 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
10657 Here is an example of how to do this:
10658
10659 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
10660 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
10661 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
10662 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
10663
10664 ...
10665 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
10666
10667 ...
10668 ;; When done with the overlays:
10669 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
10670 ;; Or respectively:
10671 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
10672
10673 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
10674
10675 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
10676 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
10677 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
10678 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
10679
10680 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
10681 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
10682 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
10683
10684 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
10685 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
10686
10687 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
10688 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
10689
10690 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
10691 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
10692 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
10693
10694 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
10695 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
10696 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
10697 determine the syntax type of the character.
10698
10699 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
10700 of the current buffer.
10701
10702 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
10703 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
10704 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
10705
10706 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
10707 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
10708 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
10709 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
10710 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
10711
10712 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
10713 text property.
10714
10715 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
10716 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
10717 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
10718
10719 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
10720 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
10721 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
10722 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
10723 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
10724
10725 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
10726 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
10727 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
10728
10729 ** Changes in face features
10730
10731 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
10732 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
10733
10734 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
10735 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
10736
10737 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
10738 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
10739
10740 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
10741 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
10742
10743 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
10744 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
10745 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
10746 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
10747 overlay property).
10748
10749 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
10750 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
10751
10752 ** Changes in file-handling functions
10753
10754 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
10755 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
10756 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
10757 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
10758
10759 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
10760 begins with ~.
10761
10762 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
10763 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
10764
10765 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
10766 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
10767
10768 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
10769 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
10770
10771 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
10772 character code conversion as well as other things.
10773
10774 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
10775 (formerly it did not).
10776
10777 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
10778 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
10779
10780 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
10781 instead of constant strings.
10782
10783 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
10784 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
10785 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
10786
10787 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
10788 in the same way as before.
10789
10790 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
10791 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
10792 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
10793
10794 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
10795 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
10796 else, and returns nil.
10797
10798 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
10799 directory cannot be listed.
10800
10801 ** Changes in minibuffer input
10802
10803 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
10804 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
10805 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
10806 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
10807 ways:
10808
10809 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
10810 It is available through the history command M-n.
10811
10812 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
10813 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
10814 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
10815 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
10816 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
10817
10818 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
10819 argument in this way.
10820
10821 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
10822 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
10823 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
10824
10825 ** Echo area features
10826
10827 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
10828 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
10829 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
10830 after the echo area is cleared.
10831
10832 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
10833 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
10834
10835 ** Keyboard input features
10836
10837 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
10838 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
10839
10840 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
10841 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
10842 by keyboard macros.
10843
10844 ** Frame-related changes
10845
10846 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
10847 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
10848 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
10849
10850 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
10851 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
10852 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
10853
10854 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
10855 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
10856 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
10857 in the selected frame.
10858
10859 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
10860 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
10861 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
10862
10863 ** X Windows features
10864
10865 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
10866 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
10867 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
10868
10869 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
10870 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
10871
10872 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
10873 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
10874 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
10875
10876 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
10877 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
10878
10879 ** Subprocess features
10880
10881 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
10882 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
10883 automatically.
10884
10885 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
10886 and returns the output from the command as a string.
10887
10888 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
10889 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
10890
10891 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
10892 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
10893
10894 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
10895 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
10896 goes after the other menu items.
10897
10898 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
10899 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
10900 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
10901 are in use.
10902
10903 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
10904 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
10905
10906 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
10907 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
10908 form.
10909
10910 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
10911 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
10912 but its hook is still run.
10913
10914 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
10915 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
10916
10917 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
10918 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
10919 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
10920
10921 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
10922 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
10923 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
10924 warned.
10925
10926 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
10927 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
10928
10929 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
10930 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
10931 functions like display-time.
10932
10933 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
10934 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
10935
10936 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
10937 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
10938 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
10939
10940 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
10941 if there is an error in compilation.
10942
10943 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
10944 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
10945 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
10946 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
10947
10948 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
10949 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
10950 the *scratch* buffer.
10951
10952 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
10953 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
10954 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
10955 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
10956
10957 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
10958 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
10959 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
10960
10961 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
10962 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
10963 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
10964 and compose-mail-other-frame.
10965
10966 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
10967 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
10968 full name of the specified user will be returned.
10969
10970 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
10971 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
10972 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
10973 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
10974 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
10975 files at all.
10976
10977 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
10978 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
10979 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
10980 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
10981
10982 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
10983 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
10984 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
10985 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
10986
10987 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
10988
10989 ** imenu.el changes.
10990
10991 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
10992 item from menu created by imenu.
10993
10994 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
10995 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
10996 select one of those items.
10997
10998 * For older news, see the file ONEWS
10999
11000 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
11001 Copyright information:
11002
11003 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
11004
11005 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
11006 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
11007 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
11008 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
11009
11010 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
11011 of this document, or of portions of it,
11012 under the above conditions, provided also that they
11013 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
11014
11015 Local variables:
11016 mode: outline
11017 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$"
11018 end:

savannah-hackers-public@gnu.org
ViewVC Help
Powered by ViewVC 1.1.26